JP7307383B2 - slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of displaying game history information .

2. Description of the Related Art There is known a conventional game machine that stores cumulative payouts and graphically displays changes in the cumulative payouts according to player's operation (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2007-125121 A

A problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to easily check game history information .

The present invention
Equipped with predetermined display means capable of displaying game history information,
The game history information is composed of information about the type of game history and numerical information about the game history,
As the game history information, there is a case where the role material ratio information for a predetermined number of games is displayed and a case where the accumulated role material ratio information is displayed,
Numerical information on the game history corresponding to the role material ratio information for the predetermined number of games is the role material ratio for the predetermined number of games (payout of game media when the role material is activated in the predetermined number of games against the total number of game media paid out in the predetermined number of games) percentage of the number) and
Numerical information related to the gaming history corresponding to the cumulative role ratio information is the cumulative role ratio (ratio of the number of game media paid out when the role product is activated to the total number of game media paid out),
making it possible to display information related to the type of game history by means of the first display section and the second display section of the predetermined display means;
Numerical information relating to game history can be displayed on the third display section and the fourth display section of the predetermined display means,
When the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display section is configured to be lit,
When displaying the cumulative role ratio information, if the cumulative number of games played is less than a specific number, information on the type of game history corresponding to the cumulative role ratio information can be displayed blinking,
In the case of displaying the role product ratio information for the predetermined number of games played, if the total number of games played is less than a predetermined value (the predetermined value is smaller than the specific value), the game history corresponding to the role product ratio information for the predetermined number of games played information about the type of
When the cumulative number of games reaches a specific upper limit, updating of the cumulative number of games is completed.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to easily confirm the game history information .

3 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows accumulation|storage number display LED, advantageous area display LED, acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a main control board accommodated in a board case, (a) showing Example 1 and (b) showing Example 2; It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing display windows (transparent windows) provided in the slot machine, positional relationships among reels, activated lines, and the like; It is a diagram (1) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (2) showing combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (3) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 4 is a diagram (4) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 5 is a diagram (5) showing combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 6 is a diagram (6) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (1) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (2) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (3) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (4) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pushing order instruction|indication number, an advantageous pushing order, and display content. It is a figure which shows a production|presentation group number table. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of advantageous area display LED. 4 is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, acquisition number display LED, and image display device; 10 is a timing chart (examples 3 and 4) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, acquisition number display LED, and image display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of display of the pressing order instruction information by the obtained number display LED and notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device; It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area regarding an advantageous area and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM and shows a storage area related to the total number of coins to be paid out. It is a part of RWM and is a diagram showing a storage area related to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation. It is a part of the RWM and shows a storage area related to the number of payouts upon activation of the accessory. FIG. 10 is a diagram (modification) which is a part of RWM and shows a storage area related to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the number of games, etc. using a register. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the number of games, etc., without using a register. 9 is a flow chart showing the flow of calculation processing for an advantageous section ratio; It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on storage number display LED. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information on an acquired number display LED; 2 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a main control board accommodated in a board case, (a) shows an example 1, (b) shows an example 2. FIG.

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows. "RT" means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replay, small combination) to be drawn and the probability of winning is a unique drawing state, and "RT transition" means one By shifting from one RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be the lottery target changes. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and it is impossible that the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and another RT. do not have. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.

RTs include non-RTs, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later). Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is referred to herein, it includes non-RT. In this embodiment, the non-internal medium is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal medium is RT4. The types (number) of replays to be selected by lottery and their winning probabilities differ between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during special games. In this embodiment, both 1BBA and 1BBB operations draw at least one replay. A "hand" refers to a lottery target, and in the present embodiment, a lottery is drawn for a conditional device, and the conditional device is set to include at least one hand. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (has at least one winning combination).

The lottery condition devices include a "accessory condition device" including any "special award (accessory)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small winning combination or a replay. . The "accessory condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special role is won, SB (single bonus), RB (first type special role; regular bonus), CB (second type special role; challenge bonus), which is a device that facilitates small role winning, 1BB (first-class continuous action device; first-class big bonus) and 2BB (second-class continuous action device; second-class big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class role product continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special role product (RB). Similarly, the second-class role continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the second-class special role (CB). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and there are two types (1BBA and 1BBB) to be described later. During the operation of 1BB, RB is terminated when either two wins or two games are satisfied, and after that, RB is activated again on the condition that the termination condition of 1BB operation is not satisfied. . Also, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "win and replay condition device" includes either a small win or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In this embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided. On the other hand, the "accessory condition device" includes any of RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, or SB or CB that does not carry over the winning information to the next game or later. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over winning information to the next game or later is provided.

When the winning information is won in the role condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information of the special role is displayed until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops on the effective line. is carried over to the next game. A game in which the winning information is not won in the accessory condition device including any of the special combinations that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special combination has not yet stopped on the effective line even though the winning condition device has been won, that is, the game carrying over the winning information of the special combination is "internal". It says. In the present embodiment, the game in which the accessory condition device is won is included in "non-internal", but the game in which the accessory condition device is won may be included in "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch means that in a game in which the game result (combination of symbols that stop on the active line) is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, the winning combination with the highest number of payouts wins. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The "advantageous mode of operation" is also referred to as the correct mode of operation.

In addition, the "operation mode" is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switch and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line). In the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" means a game when the bell is won in the pressing order (small win group B, small win group C), and overlapping replays (replay group B, replay group C). ) corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

In addition, when the press order bell is won, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct order It is sometimes referred to as a bell (small winning combination) in which the display of the combination of symbols, such as the largest number of small winning combinations, is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the order of pushing the wrong answer when the winning order of the bell is won, there is a case where the cheap bell wins or a case where the winning combination is lost according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stop appearing symbols (combination of symbols on the active line, also referred to as "lost symbols") displayed when a winning combination is lost are called "pattern symbols", and have pattern symbols 01-03.

On the other hand, when the replay wins are duplicated (replay B group, replay C group wins), different combinations of symbols are stopped and displayed according to the order in which the stop switches are pressed. ”). In this case, the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher probability of winning a replay, or the combination of symbols that maintains an RT with a higher probability of winning a replay, are displayed in a stopped order. Also referred to as "push order" or "elevated push order". On the other hand, the pressing order in which the combination of symbols that shift from an advantageous RT (for example, an RT with a high replay winning probability) to a disadvantageous RT (for example, an RT with a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed is called an "incorrect answer." Also referred to as "Push Order" or "Falling (Relegation) Push Order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described "advantageous operation mode" to the player. In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, if the "instruction function" is a device for facilitating the winning of small wins, the "instruction function" displays the correct pushing order for winning the correct pushing order (high bell) when the pushing order bell wins. This does not include displaying the order of pressing correct answers for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) when multiple replays are won.

In the following embodiments, the ``instruction function'' refers to the function of displaying an ``advantageous operation mode'' to the player, and the ``activation of the instruction function'' refers to displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , and displaying the order of pressing the correct answers to win an advantageous replay when the replay is won multiple times. It should be noted that showing the content of the 'instruction' to the player is 'display', and informing the player of the content of the instruction is 'informing'. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function". Also, "instruction" is a concept that has the meaning of "instruction", but the player will not be penalized for not following the "instruction". However, if you do not follow the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the higher bell may not win when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, or a disadvantageous replay may be awarded when the replay is duplicated.

In addition, "instruction function operation game" means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small win group B, small win group C, replay group B, replay C It means a game that activates the instruction function in the game that won the group). Therefore, the instruction function activation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may also be referred to as an information game. Also, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the game is not an instruction function activation game when the instruction function is not activated.

In this embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section", a "standby section", and an "advantageous section". First, the "normal section" is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order) to be described later. It is a game section that prohibits transmission to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not operate the instruction function). However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (role), it is possible to determine whether to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.). Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is also impossible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board, which will be described later.

In the normal section, when making a transition decision to an advantageous section, it is necessary to make a transition decision by associating (tying) with the winning condition device. Here, determining whether to shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device means the case of determining whether to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device, and the fact that the specific condition device has been won. There is a case where a lottery is separately performed as to whether or not to move to the advantageous section under the condition of.

In this embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery for the condition device. Also, the length of the advantageous section (the number of games played) to be determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB, which will be described later, as an initial value, it becomes an advantageous section of 50 games counted from the end of the 1BB game, and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it may be an advantageous section that only executes one instruction function activated game (excluding games won in small combination C group, replay group B, and replay group C). be.

Furthermore, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device, the condition device that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section , a conditional device that is a condition for performing a lottery) is set so that the conditional device does not have a setting difference in the probability of winning. Here, the "set value" determines the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the expected value of the ball output). ) is set. The set values are provided in six stages, for example, setting 1 to setting 6. FIG. And, "a conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability (common setting)" refers to a conditional device in which the winning probability is the same for all settings.

In addition, it is only possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability, and when the condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability is won , it does not mean that you always have to move to the advantageous section or that you always have to draw a lottery to move to the advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when a condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability is won.

On the other hand, the "conditional device (by setting) having a setting difference in the winning probability" means that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, if the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, or if the winning probabilities for some setting values are different from the winning probabilities for some other setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 5 winning probabilities is "x" and the winning probability of setting 6 is "y (≠x)").

In addition, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). Specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content (advantageous operation mode) refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that the (advantageous operation mode) can be identified. A game during an advantageous section may also be referred to as a reportable game. Conversely, games during the normal interval and games during the standby interval may be referred to as non-reportable games. However, the sub-control board cannot output an effect that is contrary to the instruction content issued by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum number of payouts (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game in which the instruction function activation game can be executed (when the accessory is not activated) can be acquired. In a game in which a conditional device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, at least one game or more is performed by instructing the operation mode of a stop switch for winning a winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as so-called pressing order bell condition devices. In the small combination B group, when the pressing order is correct, the small combination 01, which is a 9-card combination, always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a 1-card combination can be won (there is a possibility that the winning combination is lost). On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02, which is a three-card winning combination, always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a single winning combination always wins.

Then, the game when the instruction function activation game is executed is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3". Furthermore, the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is "3" is "9" (at the time of winning a minor winning combination of 01). For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, by activating the instruction function when the conditional device (minor winning combination B) that allows the winning of the minor winning combination 01 is won, the correct pressing order for winning the minor winning combination 01 is determined. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game in which a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may always be operated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. On the other hand, even in a game in which a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function does not need to be activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section has been made. A waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be transitioned to the advantageous section, the normal section may be transitioned to the standby section, and the standby section may be transitioned to the advantageous section. In addition, it is not possible to shift from an advantageous section to a standby section, and after the advantageous section ends, it always shifts to a normal section. The waiting section can be shifted to the advantageous section only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes the special role that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, and corresponds to the special role. A game in which a combination of symbols is displayed must always end. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed. Further, in the standby section, the main control board cannot operate the instruction function or transmit a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board. When the main control board activates the instruction function and transmits a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board, it is a condition that it is in the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C) is executed, and the game is executed a predetermined number of times. have In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are played, basically, when a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is activated. It should be noted that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but to, for example, perform an end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and terminate the advantageous section when the lottery is won. may

Alternatively, the instruction function operation game execution condition is not satisfied just by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the instruction function operation game is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Also, during the advantageous interval, it is determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous interval. In addition, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always ended at that point even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (limiter operation) and shift to the normal section.

Furthermore, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if you have never won a conditional device (small win group B) that has an advantageous operation mode that allows you to acquire the maximum payout number (9), or you will not win. However, even if you have never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch that wins the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum payout number, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation), and normal Move to section.

Although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment is defined as follows. a) In the normal section, the lottery (even if it is decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device) to determine whether to move to the advantageous section must be tied to the conditional device that has no set difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not differ according to the set value. b) The setting value must not be referred to for the additional lottery for the advantageous section (even if the lottery is decided without a lottery). When adding an advantageous section based on the winning condition device, it must be tied to a condition device that has no set difference.

c) Special role in the normal section (meaning a special role that carries over the winning, hereinafter the same in this paragraph.) During the internal or during the special role operation, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (It may be decided at the same time as the lottery of the condition device ) shall not be performed. Also, during the special role, even if it is in the advantageous section, the additional lottery for the advantageous section (it may be decided without performing the lottery) should not be performed. Furthermore, if you win a condition device with a setting difference that includes a special role in an advantageous section and the special role is in operation, an additional lottery for the advantageous section during the operation of the special role (decide without performing a lottery) ) shall not be performed. Here, conventionally, since it was common to perform an AT lottery even after being inside the inside, even if it was inside inside, without winning a special role, while maintaining inside the inside, waiting for AT winning. was possible. Recently, however, it is considered desirable not to conduct lotteries for ATs internally. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that when a special combination is won in a normal section and becomes inside, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section must not be performed within that section. Furthermore, when winning a special role in an advantageous section and becoming inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, betting for the next game is allowed). ), it must be displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section, etc.). Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to consume a certain number of games (via an omen) from the time the AT is won until the player is notified of the AT win. rice field. Further, for example, in the case of lottery of AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the player fails to win the rare role in the game, the player will be notified that the rare role has been won and that the AT has been drawn based on the rare role. Therefore, even if the AT is won by winning the rare role, the game may be stopped before the AT winning is notified. After that, when someone else plays a game on that machine, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (which the previous player has won). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until betting for the next game becomes possible), it is displayed that it is the advantageous section from the next game. Therefore, the above problem does not occur. As described above, conventionally, AT winning is notified after AT winning (especially after AT's omen is passed through). , in that the advantageous section is displayed before the advantageous section starts. Furthermore, the conventional AT winning notification was only performed as part of the effect, but in this embodiment, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section) lighting, etc.) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

In addition, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%". As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous interval ratio is a numerical value obtained by truncating decimal places as a result of calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired pattern can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). show. Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the effective line within the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (until the effective line The fact that it is impossible to pull in is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1". On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), it is possible to always stop (pull) the target symbol on the effective line. = 1”.

And "PB=1" has a case where all reels are like that and a case where only specific (part of) reels are like that. In this embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB=1", exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When they are arranged at intervals, "PB≠1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reel in this embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, the symbol will be "PB=1".

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". On the other hand, the "N+1"th game is called the "next game".

"Ball output rate" is a value calculated by the expected number of medals to be paid out / the number of inserted medals. When it is "1", the status quo is maintained. state, and when it is less than "1", it is a state in which the number of medals decreases. Further, the "expected number of tokens to be paid out" is calculated by summing "probability of winning the combination x number of tokens to be paid out" for all the combinations to be selected by lottery in the game.

Furthermore, the "number of difference" is a value calculated by "the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals to be paid out) - the number of inserted medals". When the number of inserted medals is "3" and the number of paid out medals (expected value) is "3", the difference is "±0", and when the number of paid out medals (expected value) exceeds "3", The number of difference exceeds "0", and when the number of medals to be paid out (expected value) is less than "3", the number of difference is less than "0".

A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (regular number) is set to three when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets that can be played (prescribed number) is set to two. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals from the medal slot or operates a bet switch to bet the stored medals. The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed game machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It can be stored in the game machine as a game medium for performing. In addition, since the display of the character ratio, etc., which will be described later, can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to the pinball game machine, the "game medium" includes not only medals but also game balls. be

"Reserve" refers to crediting medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". "Reservation" may be used in a sense including betting, but in this specification, "reservation" is used in a sense not including "betting." In this embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of coins that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small win is won and medals are paid out, the medals are stored. Also, when the medals are inserted from the medal slot and the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when the medals are inserted from the medal slot, there are cases where the medals are betted and cases where the medals are stored.

It should be noted that the fact that the slot machine 10 "pays out" medals to the player is equivalent to the fact that the player "earns" medals. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10 side, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player side, it is "acquisition of medals". Therefore, there is a case of calling "payout (number of coins)" (for example, payout means 67) and a case of calling "acquisition (number of cards)" (for example, winning number display LED 78), but both have the same meaning.

In this specification, numbers (especially 8-bit numbers) with "B" at the end are binary numbers. Similarly, numbers ending with "H" mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary. However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the suffixes "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like. <First Embodiment> FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 in this embodiment. A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 . The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 . In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on game progress and the like. Data (total number of games played, etc.) necessary for displaying management information, which will be described later, is stored in the RWM 53 . The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.

The main CPU 55 is a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and more. payout, etc. The main CPU 55 incorporates registers. Especially in this embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Also, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU. An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is sent inside the medal selector. The medal selector, as shown in FIG. 1, includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. FIG. When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, it is first detected by the path sensor 43a.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 .

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination ends). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45, an input sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is detected by the path sensor 43a and then detected by the insertion sensor 44. FIG.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. properly connected. The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or specified number) medals are provided. A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the prescribed number in this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated. can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, when the accessory is in operation, operating the 3-bet switch 40b makes it possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

Also, the start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right). Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped. Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this manner, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them. Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display board 75 is equipped with an accumulated number display LED 76 , an advantageous section display LED 77 and an acquired number display LED 78 . These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary to provide all the LEDs 76 to 78 on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as display substrates 75A, 75B, . . . Any one of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided in the .

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the accumulated number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the winning number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view. In addition, in FIG. 2, a display substrate 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the reserved number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays upper digits and a digit 2 that displays lower digits. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits. Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in this embodiment, it consists of a seven-segment LED (so-called seven-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point, a dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). It is As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four digits 1 to 4, but in this embodiment there are nine digits, and the other digits are mounted on the main control board. 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer). For example, when no medals are betted or stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "00". Here, when one medal is cleaned, the one medal is betted for the game. When two more medals are inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the prescribed number is three). Therefore, when the number of cleaned medals is up to three, the medals are betted and not stored. As the medals continue to be maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76 .

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if tokens are taken out from the token insertion slot 43, the tokens cleaned up are returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.例文帳に追加

Here, when a winning combination with a medal payout (excluding replay) is won and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, the medals are placed inside the slot machine 10 prior to the actual payout of medals from the payout port. Medals are saved. For example, when the accumulated number of coins before winning a winning combination is "10", the display of the accumulated number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19" when a winning combination of 9 coins is won.

Furthermore, when the number of stored coins exceeds "50" when a winning combination is won, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of accumulated medals is "47" before winning a role, and 9 medals are paid out by winning a winning role of 9, 3 medals are accumulated and the number of accumulated medals becomes "50", exceeding "50". Six coins are paid out from the payout port.

Furthermore, when winning a replay, medals are not stored or paid out, and the same number of medals that have been bet in the relevant game are automatically bet for the replay. For example, the game is played with 3 bets (3 medals), and when a replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the win in the replay is the insertion of medals for replaying the game, the medals cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed after that.

In addition, according to the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Model Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to replay stops on the active line, the conditional device for replaying It is interpreted as an act and not a "winning". However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay on the activated line is referred to as "replay winning".

Also, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 . The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be off during the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be on during the advantageous section. Therefore, by confirming the ON/OFF state of the advantageous section display LED 77, the player can determine at a glance whether or not the player is currently staying in the advantageous section.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located near the adjustment switch 46. FIG. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has accumulated medals (for example, when "10" is displayed in the accumulated number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46. At that time, It can be easily confirmed that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not in the advantageous section. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against his will even though it is in the advantageous interval (or the advantageous interval from the next game).

Furthermore, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits like the stored number display LED 76 . When there are no medals to be paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is "00". From "00" to "09". Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be extinguished and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the win number display LED 78 displays an error number "dE". Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push sequence instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also serves as a display of the acquisition number, error details, and an advantageous operation mode based on the operation of the instruction function. The image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 also informs of the advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is activated.

Here, in this specification, the display of the pressing order by the main control board 50 using the acquired number display LEDs 78 is referred to as "operation of the instruction function", and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is referred to as "notification of the pressing order". called. Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is called a "pressing order instruction number." Furthermore, information such as "=1" in FIG. 20, which is the pressing order displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, is referred to as "pressing order instruction information". That is, by operating the instruction function, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 .

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. As shown in FIG. The main control board 50 is accommodated and sealed in a transparent board case 16 for its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be opened) unless the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed. In FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is illustrated so as to be seen through the board case 16 without being blocked. Note that the crimped portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, seals indicating that it is a regular main control board 50, a manufacturing number, a record of opening of the caulked portion 16a, etc. are pasted. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so that they are not. A digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which displays the current set value when confirming or changing the setting. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50. For example, the set value display LED 73 can also be used as the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78 on the back side of the front door.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74 . In order to ensure visibility, the management information display LED 74 is preferably designed to have a size of width m1×length n≧36 square millimeters in FIG. 3(a) for each digit housing. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit case, it is preferable to design the size as follows: Width m2×vertical width n÷4 (number of digits)≧36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, although there is one main control board 50 in Example 1 of (a), the main control board 50 is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards as in Example 2 of (b). Alternatively, each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the whole in the board case 16 and seal it. In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is made up of two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on each of the main control boards 50A and 50B, and the connectors are connected by harnesses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used without using a harness (the same applies to FIG. 42(b), which will be described later). Also, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board on which the management information display LED 74 is mounted.

Further, the management information display LEDs 74 may be arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), or may be arranged such that digits 6 and 7 are arranged in one upper row as shown in Example 2 of (b). , digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the bottom row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1-9, segments A-G, and segment DP. As described above, each digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven pieces) constitute so-called seven segments. .

As shown in FIG. 4, among digit 1, for example, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the upper digits of the stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is unused. In addition, among the digits 2, segments A to G constitute seven segments of lower digits of the stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is used as an advantageous section display LED 77. FIG. Furthermore, segments A to G of digits 3 and 4 constitute seven segments of the upper and lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and segment DP is unused.

Further, among the digits 5, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment DP is an LED that lights up during setting change. That is, when only the 7 segment of the set value display LED 73 is lit, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the 7 segment and the segment DP are lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is confirmed during setting change.

Segments 6 to 9 constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display information types of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 of the management information. Segment DP of digits 6-9 is unused. However, when lighting the management information display LED 74, it is also possible to light the segment DP of the digit 7. FIG. Also, by lighting the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and confirmed easily.

FIG. 4 also shows the configuration of segment data. For example, when displaying "0" as digit 1, segments A to F are lit and segments G and DP are extinguished, so the segment data is "00111111(B)". Also, when the digit 2 is displayed as "1" and the segment is in the advantageous section, the segments B, C and DP are lit, so that the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or on. Thus, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motor 32 and the like of the pattern display device. The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape printed with a plurality of types of patterns (designs constituting a combination of patterns corresponding to roles) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 will be described later. Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

Medals received from the medal insertion slot 43 are stored in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "chute section"). The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has passed since one of the payout sensors 37 detected the tokens. It is Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when the signals from both payout sensors 37 are both off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. be done. On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

Also, the power switch 11 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the slot machine 10 . The setting key switch 12 is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion opening and rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming or changing the setting.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value. For example, the setting value is incremented by "1" each time the button is operated during setting change. In the present embodiment, the set values have settings 1 to 6. During the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set values change from "1"→"2"→...→"6"→ Switches from "1" to . . . One of the set values is displayed while the settings are being changed, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set values are confirmed.

When the reset switch 14 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. A door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting whether the front door is opened or closed.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external collective terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52 . Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. In this embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous zone signal), an external signal indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or power failure, etc., indicates opening of the front door of the slot machine 10. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby. Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for outputting effects. The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these. The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect. In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window 17) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from the top of the slot machine 10, frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination, and the like are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game. Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effects images (correct answer order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, It displays game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section, etc.). Also, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is the game history of the player) and to change various settings by the hall manager (store manager, etc.). It is used when

Next, the winning combination, symbol combination, etc. of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and each frame displays a predetermined pattern. In the figure, "blank" does not mean that no pattern is displayed, but a predetermined pattern corresponding to "blank" is displayed. "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Bell C" are similar in appearance, but different.

FIG. 6A shows the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10, the positional relationship between the reels 31, and the effective lines (symbols). It is a diagram showing a display line that displays a combination). In this embodiment, three reels 31 (a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three patterns that are continuous vertically can be seen from the display window 17 . Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 . In addition, the number at the lower right of each pattern indicates the pattern number.

Also, FIG. 6(B) illustrates designations of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped, which can be seen from the display window 17, are referred to as "upper row", "middle row", and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left”, and “lower left”. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(A), valid lines are set for the nine symbols visible through the display window 17 .

Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 are stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and a symbol corresponding to one of the winning combinations. This is the winning line for that hand when the combination stops on that line. In this embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. there is

An invalid line is a line that is not set as an active line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops on that line, a profit is given according to that combination. This line does not perform (medal payout, etc.). In other words, an invalid line is a line that is not subject to a combination of symbols in the first place.

Further, conventionally, there has been known a slot machine in which the number of effective lines varies according to the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1, when the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3, and when the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. and so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game is played by inserting three or two medals, and in all games, one line shown in FIG. There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of inserted medals. Therefore, in this specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 6(A).

7 to 12 are diagrams showing the types of winnings (eg, winnings included in the condition devices drawn by the winning winnings lottery means 61, which will be described later), the number of payouts, and combinations of symbols in the present embodiment. FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers “101” to "120").

The winnings of this embodiment are roughly divided into special winnings, replays (replay winnings), and small winnings. A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops on the activated line (the combination wins, the same shall apply hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out. However, the payout number at the time of winning the special role is set to 0. Also, in the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 7 to 12, the "specified number 3" displayed in the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts, etc. when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not activated, that is, the number of inserts during normal game). , "regular number 2" indicates the payout number and the like when the prescribed number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of coins inserted during the special game). For example, Replay 01 with the number "3" indicates that a replay is performed with the specified number of 3 cards, and "-" with the specified number of 2 indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (accessories). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB). A special role is a role to shift from a normal game to a special game. When 1BB is won, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of the accessory). During the 1BB game (when the accessory is activated), the ball output rate is set to exceed "1", so that the player can expect to obtain more medals than when the accessory is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. .

Further, replay (replay role) is a role that allows a replay in which the number of medals inserted in the current game is maintained (medals are automatically bet). The replays of this embodiment include replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13"), as shown in FIG. Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are shifted to other RTs when a specific RT wins. These replays are therefore also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when replay 02 wins in RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). Therefore, replay 02 is also referred to as a promoted replay. Also, when replay 03 wins in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (an RT more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, replay 03 is also referred to as a drop (downgrade) replay.

In addition, replays 04 and 05 are firstly used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of conditional devices by winning multiple replays, and in this embodiment, in the conditional devices described later, Replays included in replays B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When replay B2, B3, C2 or C3 is won, replay 04 or 05 as control replay does not stop on the active line.

In addition, replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and included in replay E of the conditional device described below. When replay E is won in an advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition. Replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the operation of 1BB, and is included in replay D of the condition device to be described later. When the replay D is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the minor winning combination includes minor winning combinations 01 to 40 (numbers "14" to "100"). Small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that are won in the correct pressing order when winning the pressing order bell, which will be described later. Further, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the standard bell) that can be won (PB≠1) in the order of pressing the wrong answer when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell. Furthermore, small role 35-3
8 is a rare small win (small win corresponding to watermelon or cherry). Further, the small winning combinations 39 and 40 are the small winning combinations that can be won only when the predetermined number is two, that is, when the accessory is activated.

As described above, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the roles themselves, but appear when the winning combination is lost (when the winning combination is not awarded) when the pressing order is incorrect when the pressing order bell is won. It is a combination of patterns. Furthermore, the pattern symbol is a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment), when the combination of the symbols stops on the effective line, the RT is shifted (shifted to RT2 in this embodiment). combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 always appear when a winning combination is lost (when a winning combination fails to win) when the pushing order is incorrect when winning a minor combination B group. However, other combination of symbols (not the role itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the active line in the game in which the role is won, the role to be carried over to the next game and thereafter and the role not to be carried over are determined. . The hand carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.

On the other hand, winning of 1BB is carried over, but small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the conditional device, when a small combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which one of these winning combinations is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won. , the rights related to the winning role shall be extinguished.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or manually inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) performs a winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and controls all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the result of the combination lottery of the combination lottery means 61. Stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery (decision, selection) of a conditional device (winning combination). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like. In addition, "conditional device winning" is also called role lottery result, lottery result, winning number, winning result, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. A determining means for determining whether or not a conditional device has been won and the conditional device that has been won is provided.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determining means determines the conditional device corresponding to the region to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extracting means with a conditional device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random number belongs to the winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of conditional devices drawn by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each conditional device. In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42 when each condition device is won will be described in the reel control means 65. do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment includes the "accessory condition device", which is a condition device that includes any of the special combinations that can carry over the winning information to the next game, and the condition device that does not carry over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "win and replay condition device" which is a condition device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay. Winning the accessory condition device corresponds to winning 1BB in this embodiment, and has accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”. Accessory condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of a special role, Accessory condition device number "1" corresponds to winning 1BBA, and Accessory condition device number "2" corresponds to winning 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0", and the winning and replay condition device number is "1". On the other hand, when 1BBA is single-won, the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small winning combination are won. becomes "26". When 1BB and a small winning combination or a replay win, priority is given to the winning of the small winning combination or the replay in this game (the order of priority can be arbitrarily set). Winning of a small winning combination or replay is effective only in the current game, so the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning a prize.

The winning and replay condition device will be described below. The condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of the combination (so-called loss). Replay A with the condition device number "1" is a single winning replay 01. When replay A is won, replay 01 wins regardless of the pressing order (any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 with condition device numbers "2" to "4" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"), replays C1 to C3 with condition device numbers "5" to "7" (hereinafter collectively will be referred to as “replay group C”.) are duplicate wins of a plurality of types of replays, and are duplicate wins including at least one of replay 01 or 02. The types of winning replays are set to differ according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed. For example, in replay B1 with the condition device number "2", replay 02 wins in the pressing order of left first stop, and replay 01 wins when other than left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In addition, in the case of replay double winning, the replay (replay role) wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no concept of higher/lower payout of medals or the like. However, for example, when replay B1 is won in RT2, RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning replay 02 in the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning replay 01. Also, when replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning replay 01 in the left first stop. On the other hand, other than the left first stop, by winning the replay 03, RT is lowered (downgraded) (shifted from RT3 to RT2).

Replay D of the condition device number "8" is a single winning replay 06. When replay D is won, replay 06 wins regardless of the pressing order. Similarly, replay E with the condition device number "9" is a double winning of replays 04 and 05. When replay E is won, replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the pressing order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rare replays. In particular, in this embodiment, lottery is held at RT1, and if replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition.

In FIG. 14, a small winning combination A with a conditional device number of "10" is placed on a so-called common bell, and a small winning combination of 01 is won alone. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 (PB=1). In FIGS. 14 and 15, small wins B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win group B") with condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push-order bells. , small win 01 (9 bells, 9 wins) and at least one of the small wins 03 to 34 (1 win).

When these conditional devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the pressing order is correct, "PB=1" and the high bell (9 bells, 9 bells), a small combination 01 wins. On the other hand, when it is the wrong answer pressing order, according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated), a small winning combination 03 that is a cheap bell (one-piece winning combination) There is a case where 1 to 34 wins and a case where none of the small wins wins (a case where pattern symbols are displayed due to a dropout).

In FIG. 16, small wins C1 to C3 with condition device numbers "23" to "25" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win group C") are so-called "push It corresponds to a regular bell, and is a duplicate winning including a small winning combination 02 (three bells, three winning combination) and small winning combinations 03 to 10 (one winning combination). When these conditional devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct pressing order is "PB=1", a small win 02 with a high bell (3 bells, 3 bells) is won. On the other hand, when the incorrect answer is pressed, "PB=1" and one of the small wins 03 to 10, which is a cheap bell (one-card win), wins. Therefore, when the small winning combination C group is won, there is no case where pattern symbols are displayed (dropped), unlike when the small winning group B is winning. It should be noted that the case is not limited to this, and there may be a case where none of the small wins is won.

When the small win group B is won, 9 coins are paid out when the high bell is won, so when the pressing order is correct, 3 coins are put in (number of coins inserted) and 9 coins are out (number of coins paid out), which is the difference in the game this time. The number of sheets becomes "+6 sheets". Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pressing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0), the number of medals decreases. On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, 3 coins are paid out when a high-level bell is won. The difference number of sheets is "±0 sheets". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals remains at the current state, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1), the number of medals decreases.

The reason for providing both the pushing order bell for paying out 9 balls and the pushing order bell for paying out 3 balls in the correct pushing order is to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the pressing order is incorrect when winning a minor combination B group, the probability of winning a one-piece combination is 25%, and the other 75% are pattern symbols. is set to be displayed (no payout when displaying pattern patterns). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the pressing order is incorrect when the small combination C group is won, "PB=1" wins the one-piece combination. In this way, two types of push order bells are provided with different payout numbers depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect, and the probability of winning is appropriately set, so that the ball payout rate can be set within an appropriate range. become.

The small winning combination D with condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single win of the small winning combination 35, and is set to "PB≠1". Also, the small winning combination E1 with the conditional device number "27" and the small winning combination E2 with the conditional device number "28" correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry), like the small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a multiple winning combination including the small winning combination 37 in addition to the small winning combinations 36 and 38 described above. When a small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, a double winning combination (a small winning combination of 36 or 38) is won regardless of the pressing order.

The small combination F of the condition device number "29" is a combination drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and the small combination 01 to 39 are repeatedly won. When the small combination F is won, the small combination 39 with 10 cards wins with "PB=1". The small combination G of the condition device number "30" is a combination drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and the small combination 40 is won alone. When the small combination G is won, the small combination 40, which is a 9-card combination, is awarded with "PB=1".

17 and 18 show winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when condition devices are drawn by the role lottery means 61, and show the set numbers of the accessory condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a diagram. If the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are divided by "65536", the winning probability is obtained. For example, the set numbers for single winning of 1BBA are set to "20" and "10" ("30" in total) for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a setting number table of a condition device that is common to settings and can be determined to move to an advantageous section, or that performs an addition of an advantageous section (or can perform an addition lottery). Here, "common setting" means that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same numerical value. And when you win the setting common condition device, you can always decide to move to the advantageous section (determine to add during the advantageous section), or whether to move to the advantageous section ( It may be determined by lottery (whether or not to be added during the advantageous section). Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to an advantageous section (determines to add during the advantageous section) and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section (determines not to add during the advantageous section) may be provided.

In this embodiment, the setting common condition device shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device for deciding to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device for deciding not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the condition device is set to always decide to add the advantageous section. In FIG. 17, in the normal section, "O" means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and "X" means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, "Δ" means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and "X" means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section. In FIG. 17, "○" indicates that it is decided to move to the advantageous section, and "△" indicates that it is decided to add the advantageous section. It means that a lottery is made to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section, and "△" may mean to draw a lottery to determine whether or not to add an advantageous section.

Moreover, FIG. 18 shows the condition devices and their setting numbers for which it is not decided to move to the advantageous section and not to decide to add the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the condition device for determining to move to the advantageous section or to add the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. In winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and decides not to add the advantageous section. In FIG. 18, setting values 1 and 6 are shown representatively. A number is defined for each value.

In FIGS. 17 and 18, conditional devices containing 1BBA or 1BBB are drawn only in non-inside, so they are drawn in non-RT, RT1-RT3. In addition, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case of winning alone and a case of winning with a minor combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the minor combination D, E1 or E2 may be won alone. A conditional device including 1BBA or 1BBB that is drawn in RT4 is treated as a single winning of a small combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of set numbers for winning the small winning combination D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of setting numbers for winning the small combination E1 in RT4 is "1030". The set numbers for winning the small winning combination E2 alone in RT4 are "310" to "370" in total. In addition, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a conditional device with a set difference is won, and based on the winning of 1BBB, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section or to add an advantageous section. never

Also, replay D is selected by lottery only while 1BB is in operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. Then, if replay E is won in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order not to appear in other RTs, replay E is drawn by lottery only in RT1. Furthermore, the small wins D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated. On the other hand, the small wins F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, but are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

Also, in FIG. 17, the total number of entries for single winning of 1BBA is "30", but in this embodiment, the number "20" determined to move to the advantageous section in the normal section and the number "20" in the advantageous section and the number "10" which decides not to transition. That is, in the case where 1BBA is single-won, if the set number "20" is won, if the game is in the normal section, the advantageous section will be won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA is single-won, if the number "10" is won, the advantage section is not won.

In addition, when one BBA is won alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section regardless of whether the set number is "20" or "10". Similarly, the total number of numbers that result in a single winning of the small winning combination E1 is "1000". and the number "750" that determines not to transition to .

However, this is not the only option, but when the single win E1 number is set to one number "1000" (the number "250" and the number "750" are not divided) and the small winning combination E1 is won. In addition, a separate lottery may be used to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section. For example, there is a 25% probability of deciding to move to the advantageous interval, and a 75% probability of not deciding to move to the advantageous interval. In this way, it is permissible to set a number that wins in the advantageous section and a number that does not win in the advantageous section from the beginning, but the number itself is one value, and when the number is won, the game moves to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be conducted to determine whether or not to do so. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when RT4 (inside middle), there is no case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when a small winning combination D or E1 is won, when RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("*3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB is single-won, and when 1BBB and small combination D are double-won, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided. The small winning combination E2 may be double-won with 1BBB or may be single-won. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there is a case where the advantageous section is determined for both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning with 1BBA.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18, each condition device of replay A, replay B group, and replay C group is set in common, but it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, and it is added during the advantageous section not decide. However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when these replay condition devices are won, it is decided to move to the advantageous section (including lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including lottery) ) may be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in replay A, replay B group, and replay C group, setting 1 and setting 6 are slightly different (for example, "1"), replay A, replay B group, And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn by lottery only in RT2. Furthermore, Replay Group C is drawn only at RT3. Small winning combination A, small winning combination B group, and small winning combination C group all have setting differences between setting 1 and setting 6, but the numbers are the same for all RTs.

In addition, as shown in the table of "special winning combination and small winning combination" in FIG. Therefore, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1 in this respect. Furthermore, as shown in the "replay" table, RT3 has the highest probability of winning the replay. Then, in the advantageous section, it is basically set to stay at RT3, so not only the medals are increased by the operation of the instruction function when the winning order of the bell is won, but also the medals decrease less due to the replay winning. .

In addition, the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are all set as condition devices having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 for small win A is "250", and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 for small win group B (whole) is "240 (20×12) ”. Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger set number difference than the small winning combination B group. As a result, the set number of the minor winning combination A, which does not have a winning difference according to the pressing order, is set to a larger value, so that the difference in the payout rate according to the set value can be reliably provided. Also, since the combination of symbols that can be won when the minor win A is won and the symbol combination that can be won when the pressing order is correct when the minor win group B is won are set to be the same (described later), the minor win A can be won. It is not possible to guess the setting value by counting the number of winnings (winning prizes).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small win group B is set higher than the probability of winning the small win group C. Here, the maximum number of payouts when the prescribed number is 3 is 9, and during the advantageous period, at least 1 instruction function activation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (maximum number of payouts with the prescribed number of 3) is played. need to run times. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the minor combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small win group B to be higher than the winning probability of the small win group C, one indication function operating game (winning the small win group C, replay group B, replay group C) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in the advantageous section that ends only in the game except for the game that has been played. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section cannot be finished because the small win group B is not won even once during the predetermined number of times even though the advantageous section ends after the predetermined number of games are executed. be able to.

Returning to FIG. The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the win flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the win flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when replay B1 is won, the two winning flags of replay 01 and replay 02 included in the conditional device are turned on, and the winning flags of other combinations are turned off. Similarly, in the non-internal middle game, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, the small winning combination 10, the small winning combination 11, the small winning combination 18, the small winning combination 19, and the small winning combination included in the condition device The seven winning flags for the combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags for other combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, winnings of minor wins other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, so even if a minor win or replay is won in the current game and the winning flags for these wins are turned on, the current game ends. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off. On the other hand, since winning 1BB is carried over, when 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag associated with the winning 1BB is once turned on, it is maintained on until the 1BB wins. It is turned off when 1BB is won.

Further, for example, when 1BBA and a small combination D are won in duplicate by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the small combination 35 corresponding to 1BBA and a small combination D is turned on, and both combinations are not won in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, regardless of whether the minor winning combination 35 wins or does not win, the winning flag for 1BBA is maintained ON and the winning flag for the minor winning combination 35 turns OFF.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone in the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of 1BBA is turned on in this game, and when 1BBA is not won in the game of this time, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept turned on. . Furthermore, when the small winning combination A1 is won in the next game, the win flag for the small winning combination 01 is turned on in addition to the 1BBA which carries over the winning, and when the 1BBA is not won at the end of the game this time, 1BBA. is maintained on, and the winning flag for the small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61 . FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table. Note that the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 may select the pressing order instruction number in either the advantageous section or the normal section. The pressing order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section. Also, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except for sending the push order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if the pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number. For example, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay A is "A0", and the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is "A3". The pressing order instruction number has "A0" to "A3".

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. The pressing order instruction number "A0" does not have an advantageous pressing order for the player (the pressing order does not give an advantage/disadvantage, that is, the pressing order does not matter). Further, each of the pressing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" has a pressing order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous push order corresponding to push order instruction number "A2" is middle first stop.

The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 02 (the pressing order for promoting the RT). Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT). Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 (9 pieces). Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 (three pieces).

Further, in FIG. 20, "display content 1" indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50). showing. In this embodiment, the pressing order instruction numbers "A" and "0" to "3" respectively correspond to the indications of "=" and "0" to "3" of the LED (7 segment). When "=" is displayed, segments D and G in FIG. 4 among the seven segments are lit (see FIG. 26, which will be described later). Further, when the pressing order instruction number is "A0", no display (no segment is lit) may be used.

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed under the control of the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, it is the correct keystroke order displayed on the image display device 23. FIG. Note that "activation of the instruction function" means display by the main control board 50 using the acquired number display LED 78, and display by control of the sub-control board 80 corresponds to "operation of the instruction function" of the present invention. is not included. For example, when the winning and replay condition device "11" is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the operation of the instruction function causes the winning number display LED 78 to display "=1". be. In addition, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "1 XX" that allows the player to understand that the first stop is on the left.

In FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction numbers (*1) when winning a minor combination A are as follows. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of "A1" to "A3" is selected as the dummy pressing order instruction number. The selectivity is "1/3" respectively. By setting in this way, when a small winning combination A is won in an advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the pressing order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the minor winning combination A or the minor winning group B in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the minor winning combination A (set number) is higher with the setting 6 than with the setting 1. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of times the small combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous interval. In order to avoid such a strategy, when a small winning combination A is won in an advantageous section, an instruction function is activated to display dummy pushing order instruction information. Of course, by counting the number of times the minor winning combination 01 wins in games in which the pointing function is activated, it is not impossible to estimate the set value, but the number of times the minor winning combination 01 has won in games in which the pointing function is not activated is possible. This requires more trials than counting and guessing the set value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (*2) when winning the minor wins E1 and E2 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, if 1BB is won during the advantageous section and it becomes inside, the advantageous section is not added. For this reason, in the advantageous section and inside (during the game section in which the advantageous section is not added), the small winning combination E1 is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (a combination of symbols that expects to add the advantageous section) If a certain middle cherry is stopped, there is a risk of giving the player the impression of a wasteful draw. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section and inside, the pushing order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the right first stop when the small win E1 is won, the so-called middle stage cherry does not stop, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small winning combination E1. Since the number of payouts of the small combination 36 or 38 that can be won when the small combination E1 is won is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, the player will not be disadvantaged.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set for the advantageous section, which is set within 1500 games in this embodiment. Therefore, even if there is a remaining number of games played in the advantageous section, when the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally. In the case of having such game characteristics, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won near the 1500th game in the advantageous section and the cherry in the middle is displayed, the player expects the advantageous section to be added. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more have been played from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small winning combination E1 is won, the middle stage cherry is not displayed in the same way as when winning inside. , activate the indicator function to display the right first stop.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, the advantageous section is not determined. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle stage cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if the middle stage cherry is displayed during the inside or when the number of games has reached 1400 or more from the start of the advantageous section, there is a risk of misleading the player. , to see the first stop on the right. However, it is not limited to this, and when a small winning combination E2 is won, since no decision regarding the advantageous section is made in the first place, the indication function as described above may not be operated, and the middle stage cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device and the number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . It is also conceivable to send the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself to the sub-control board 80 as a result of lottery for the condition device. However, in this embodiment, the prize winning and replay condition device numbers themselves are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the prize-winning and replay condition device numbers that have been won in the game this time.

On the other hand, on the side of the main control board 50, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. After the lottery for the condition device, the performance group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加When receiving the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each conditional device has a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination A, the small winning group B, and the small winning winning combination C group is determined as "5". The effect group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, and the small winning combination group C may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7", respectively.

Therefore, the main control board 50, as a result of the condition device lottery,
If the small win group B or the small win group C is won, "5" is selected as the performance group number. Then, information on the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is "5", it can know that any one of the small win A, the small win group B, or the small win group C has been won in the game this time. can. As a result, it is possible to output the winning effect of the bell.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number "5" has been won, even if the player wins, for example, one of the small wins of group B in the game, the correct answer is pressed. You cannot know the order. In this embodiment, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period, but is not transmitted during the normal period or the standby period. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the minor winning combination A, the minor winning group B, or the small winning winning combination C group has been won, and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number as an effect. can. On the other hand, during the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces an effect indicating that one of the minor winning combination A, the small winning group B, or the small winning group C (bell) has been won, and the correct pressing order is displayed. cannot be output as a production.

Also, even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to different effect group numbers. For example, when the replay B1 is won, the pushing order instruction number is "A1" (left first), and when the minor win C1 is won, the pushing order instruction number is "A1" (left first). In both cases, the same push order instruction number is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number "2" is transmitted, and when the minor win C1 is won, the effect group number "5" is transmitted. For this reason, when effect group number "2" is transmitted, for example, the blue color indicating replay can be used to notify the order of pressing correct answers, and when effect group number "5" is transmitted, for example, a bell It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using the yellow color indicating .

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 is configured to start rotating all (three) reels 31 when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. to control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to ON/OFF of the winning flag in the current game after the lottery for the condition device is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the ON/OFF of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the effective line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line. .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). means within range. In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thus, in this embodiment, the maximum number of frames that can be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 "Replay" on the left reel 31 is positioned in the lower left stage (on the effective line), the number 5 "Bell B" is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (stop biting) to No. 5 (4-frame belly) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row.

However, not limited to the above, it is also possible to set the maximum moving frame number to 4 frames from the pattern next to the pattern positioned on the activated line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 "replay" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the lower left row, the next symbol, that is, the number 2 "blank", Up to the 6th "Replay", which is the symbol 4 frames ahead, is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the operation timing described above, the symbols No. 2 to No. 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row. In the following explanation, the maximum number of moving frames is assumed to be 4 from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.

That is, when the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbols related to the winning combination do not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of , the symbols related to the winning combination are controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that has not been won stops on the effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, the combinations of symbols corresponding to winning combinations are controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control). Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. The pull-in stop control of the pattern with the highest priority is performed.

Furthermore, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operating order) of the stop switch 42 . The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player. When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65 . By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 has a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment the number 1 symbol ("replay" for the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), what The stop position is determined in advance such that only the pattern is controlled to move (by how many frames) and the number of the pattern is stopped in the lower left row.

Here, the pattern arrangement in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 5, on all the reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thus, the "replay" of all reels 31 is the "PB=1" arrangement. Similarly, on the left reel 31, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged four at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement. Also, on the middle reel 31, four "Bell C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the "Bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement. Furthermore, on the right reel 31, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged four at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement. Also, on the left reel 31, four of either "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement. Similarly, on the middle reel 31, either "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged four at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement. Further, similarly, on the right reel 31, any one of "black 7", "blue 7", "blank" or "red 7" is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, "PB=1" arrangement is obtained by adding these four symbols.

On the other hand, on the left reel 31, "Cherry" is arranged at Nos. 3, 8, and 13, so it is not arranged at "PB=1". Similarly, for "Watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

The stop position determination table corresponding to each conditional device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above. First, the stop position determination table at the time of prize winning and replay condition device winning will be described. The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and determines the combination of symbols when the reels 31 are stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination does not stop on the effective line.

The replay A table is used when replay A is won (single win of replay 01). 31 stop positions are determined. The symbols on each reel 31 relating to replay 01 and replays 02 to 06, which will be described later, are "PB=1" on all reels 31. FIG. Therefore, when a replay wins, the winning replay always wins (when a plurality of replays wins more than once, one of the replays wins more than once) always wins.

The replay B1 table is used in a game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the replay 02 is stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped at the first left (when the pressing order is correct), and the first stop on the left is made. Except for time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in a game using the replay B1 table, at the first left stop, "Kuro 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the lower left row ("PB=1" as described above). In this case, the "replay" stops in the upper left row. Next, at the middle second stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the right third stop, "cherry" is stopped at the upper right stage. In this case, the "replay" stops in the lower right row. As a result, "black 7/watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" stops on the active line, and replay 02 wins. Furthermore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" stops at "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

On the other hand, in a game using the replay B1 table, at the middle first stop, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the upper middle row. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped at the lower left stage ("PB=1"). At this time, as described above, "replay" stops at the upper left. Also, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB=1"). As a result, "black 7/watermelon" - "blue 7/cherry" - "replay" stops on the active line, and replay 01 wins. In addition, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops at “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right”.

In a game using the replay B1 table, the same control as that during the middle first stop is performed at the right first stop. Further, as for the replay B2 table when replay B2 is won and the replay B3 table when replay B3 is won, replay 02 is awarded when the pushing order is correct and replay 01 is awarded when pushing order is incorrect by the same control as above.

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 is stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped at the first left (when the pressing order is correct), and the first stop on the left is made. Except for time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay C1 table, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the activated line at the first left stop is the same as in the above replay B1 table, so the explanation is omitted. Also, in a game using the replay C1 table, at the middle first stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB=1"). After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the lower left stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "Replay" stops in the middle left row. Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" is stopped on the upper right stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle right row. As a result, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" stops on the active line, and Replay 03 wins. Further, at "left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle", "replay"-"replay"-"replay" stops.

In a game using the replay C1 table, the same control is performed at the right first stop as at the middle first stop. Furthermore, with respect to the replay C2 table when replay C2 is won and the replay C3 table when replay C3 is won, replay 01 is won when the pushing order is correct and replay 03 is awarded when the pushing order is incorrect by the same control as above. .

The replay D table is used in the game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 06 on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is determined. Replay 06 is "PB=1". Further, the replay E table is used in a game when the replay E is won, and is used to stop the replay 04 or 05 on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. 31 stop positions are determined. In this case, either replay 04 or 05 can be stopped at "PB=1".

The small winning combination A table is used in a game when the small winning combination A is won, and the reel 31 stops the small winning combination 01 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It defines the stop position. The symbol combination of the small winning combination 01 is “Black 7/Watermelon”-“Bell C”-“Replay”, and all the reels 31 have “PB=1”. Also, when "Black 7/Watermelon" stops at the lower left stage, "Bell A/Bell B" stops at the middle left stage. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Bell A/Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, ``Bell A/Bell B'' - ``Bell C'' - ``Bell A/Bell B'' stops at ``left middle row'' - ``middle middle row'' - ``right middle row''.

The small winning combination B1 table is used in a game when the small winning combination B1 is won. Except for the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), one hand included in the winning hand (when winning a small hand B1, any of the small hand 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the reel 31 on an active line or to stop one of the pattern symbols 01-03.

The left first stop (when the pressing order is correct) in a game using the small winning combination B1 table is the same as the small winning combination A table, so the explanation is omitted. It should be noted that even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the stop control similar to that of the small winning combination A table is performed when the pressing order is correct. As a result, when the small winning combination A is won, and when the pressing order is correct when the small winning group B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell C" - "Bell A/Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the minor winning combination 01 is won in a game in which the instruction function is not operated, the player cannot know whether the winning of the minor winning combination A or the pressing order of winning the minor winning group B is correct.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, if the instruction function is activated by the dummy as described above, the player can determine whether the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B has been won. I don't know. As described above, in the present embodiment, since there is a set difference in the number of wins for the minor winning combination A, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small winning combination A has been won. However, if the stop numbers are set to be the same for when the minor combination A is won and when the pressing order is correct when the minor combination B is won, only the number of winnings of the minor combination A cannot be counted. cannot be guessed.

Further, in the game using the small combination B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed. First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19 and 26 are won as shown in FIG. 14, and the combinations of symbols are as follows. Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 10: " Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 piece) Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 piece) Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B ”(1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as the stop control of the reels 31 when a plurality of small wins with different numbers of payouts are repeatedly won. As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to ``stop all of the symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the active line'' (when the first priority cannot be adopted), as the second priority, ``number priority ' or 'number priority' to stop the reel 31 . Here, "number priority" means to preferentially stop (pull in) the symbol of the relevant reel 31, which constitutes the combination of symbols with the largest number of payouts, among the combinations of symbols that have been repeatedly won. Say. Therefore, when the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of symbols with the largest number of payouts (9 symbols). On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the relevant reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is the largest.

For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, all the middle reels 31 related to the winning winning combination cannot be stopped on the active line at the same time. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols on the middle reel 31 of the winning small winning combination, but only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line because there is only one activated line.

Therefore, when the minor combination B group is won, the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped by either the number priority or the number priority. In this embodiment, when the pressing order is correct, the reels 31 are controlled to stop based on the number priority, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the reel 31 is controlled to stop based on the number priority. When the reels are controlled to be stopped based on the number priority, the small combination 01 (9-piece combination) is not won, and the one-piece combination can be won (there is a possibility that the winning combination may be lost). In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number priority is given in a specific pressing order (correct pressing order in this embodiment), and the number priority is given in another pressing order (wrong pressing order in this embodiment). Priority is given to the number of sheets or priority to the number of sheets.

In the above example, when the number priority is given at the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line, it will stop on the effective line. The maximum number of combinations of possible symbols is two. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a small winning combination of 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of two symbols, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. can be made Here, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, a small win 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell A" is arranged at Nos. 15 and 0, and "Bell C" is arranged at No. 18. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are 11th to 19th and 0, "Bell A" or "Bell C" can be stopped on the effective line, When it is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell A" or "Bell C" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in this embodiment, "Bell A" can be stopped without stopping "Bell C". , always stop "Bell A" on the active line. The reason why "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C" is that if a winning combination is lost at the time of the third stop, a pattern pattern, which will be described later, can be displayed. This is because the pattern symbols cannot be displayed if the "Bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

On the other hand, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed to stop any of the pattern symbols on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "Bell A", the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and the left second stop, it will be "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating". . Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, if "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the symbols on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are within the range of Nos. 4 to 13. "Bell A" cannot be stopped outside this range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell A" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and a small win 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is on the effective line. Stop ("PB=1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped. In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "Bell A" - "rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A/bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the minor winning combination B1 is won. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 10 or 18 can be won. Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, the symbol "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is the symbol associated with the small win 10 or 18, is to be stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell B" is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and "Red 7" is arranged at No. 7. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are 1 to 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped on the effective line. Sometimes "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell B" or "Red 7" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". Especially in this embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are 1 to 10 will always stop "Bell B" on the valid line.

On the other hand, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol for which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "Bell B" is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and the left second stop, it will be "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", or "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating". . Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell B. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" on the effective line, if the pattern of the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 14th to 18th or 19th to 3rd. In other ranges, "Bell B" cannot be stopped. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B", and a small combination of 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is on the effective line. Stop ("PB=1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped. In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "Bell B" - "rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A/bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

As described above, when the small win B1 is won, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the single win with "PB=1", and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". /2", the symbols relating to the one-card role can be stopped. Furthermore, the pattern symbols can always be stopped when the symbols relating to the one-piece combination cannot be stopped. Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) is: 1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern symbol: Stopping with a probability of 3/4. Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 03) "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 10) Become.

Next, the case of the right first stop when winning a small winning combination B1 will be described. When the number priority is given when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is two. becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, a small winning combination of 03 or 19 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the right reel 31 has "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, "Bell A" or "Bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. can. First, it is assumed that when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, the symbol "Bell A" or "Bell C", which is a symbol related to the small win 03 or 19, is stopped on the activated line with priority. Here, similarly to the above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Also, when "bell A" cannot be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" . Furthermore, in the case of "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" before the middle and third stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the effective line, if the symbols on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are within the range of 5 to 14, "Bell A" is stopped. "Bell A" cannot be stopped outside this range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell A" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and a small win 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry ” is stopped on the active line (“PB=1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern design 02 stops on the active line. In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern design 01 stops on the active line.

It is also assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 10 or 26 can be won. Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, the symbol "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is the symbol associated with the small win 10 or 26, is stopped on the active line with priority. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B". . Furthermore, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" before the middle and third stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell B. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B", and a small combination of 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry ” is stopped on the active line (“PB=1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern design 02 stops on the active line. In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern design 01 stops on the active line.

As described above, the right reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the one-handy with "PB=1" at the right first stop when the small win B1 is won, and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". /2", the symbols relating to the one-card role can be stopped. Furthermore, the pattern symbols can always be stopped when the symbols relating to the one-piece combination cannot be stopped. Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) is: 1-card combination: winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern symbol: stopping with a probability of 3/4. Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 03) "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 10) Become. The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbols are the same as those at the time of the middle first stop. Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won with "PB=1" when the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct). On the other hand, at the time of middle or right first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the winning combination is 1/4 with a probability of 1/4, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of 3/4. .

When the small winning combination B2 is won, a small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the case of winning the small winning combination B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B2 are: Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small role 04: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 09: "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 12: "Bell C" - "Bell A" - "Red 7" (1 piece) Small role 17: "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Blue 7" (1 piece) Small role 20: "Bell C" - "Blue 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 card).

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won. Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority. First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" is prioritized during left stop. Here, if "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, if "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" can be stopped, so "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the first stop on the right side (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or the "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" is prioritized at the left stop. Here, if "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" can be stopped, so "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, if "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop it during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small winning combination B2 is won, if the pressing order is incorrect, 1-card combination: wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern symbol: stops with a probability of 3/4. Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (small role 04) "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (small role 09) Become.

When the small winning combination B3 is won, a small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the case of winning the small winning combination B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B3 are: Small role 01: “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell C”-“Replay” (9 pieces) Small role 05: “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 08: "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 13: "Bell C" - "Bell B" - "Blue 7" (1 piece) Small role 16: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Red 7" (1 piece) Small role 21: "Bell C" - "Red 7" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 card).

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won. Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority. First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" during left stop. Here, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7" in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 08 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C" in the same manner as described above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 05 is won. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the first stop on the right side (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or the "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number. First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the right first stop, stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" is prioritized during left stop. Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 05 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 08 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small winning combination B3 is won, if the pushing order is incorrect, 1-card combination: wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern symbol: stops with a probability of 3/4. Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role, "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (small role 05) "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (small role 08) Become.

When the small winning combination B4 is won, a small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case when the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when winning the small role B4 are: Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 pieces) Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 07: "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (1 piece) Small role 14: "Bell C" - "Bell B" - "Red 7" (1 piece) Small role 15: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Blue 7" (1 piece) Small role 22: "Bell C" - "Red 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece) Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 card).

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won. Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the left stop. Stop "Bell B". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 07 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 06 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B4 is won and the right first stop is made (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number. First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" is prioritized at the left stop. Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop it during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 07 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 06 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped. On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small winning combination B4 is won, if the pressing order is incorrect, 1-card combination: wins with a probability of 1/4 Pattern symbol: stops with a probability of 3/4. Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role, "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 06) "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 07) Become.

Hereinafter, the detailed description of the small winning combination B5 table to the small winning combination B12 table when winning the small winning combination B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be explained. In the small winning combination B5 table used when the small winning combination B5 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 03 or small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. A winning combination of 10 is won, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B1. In addition, in the small winning combination B6 table used when the small winning combination B6 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 is won with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B7 table used when the small winning combination B7 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 01 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. 05 or a small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3. Further, in the small winning combination B8 table used when the small winning combination B8 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 is won with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 07 is won, and the pattern symbols are stopped with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

In the small winning combination B9 table used when the small winning combination B9 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct. A winning combination of 10 is won, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B1. In addition, in the small winning combination B10 table used when the small winning combination B10 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B11 table used when the small winning combination B11 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 01 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. 05 or a small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3. Further, in the small winning combination B12 table used when the small winning combination B12 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 07 is won, and the pattern symbols are stopped with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

As is clear from the above, when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small win group B, the winable single wins are the 03 to 10 small wins. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device do not win. This setting is related to a one-piece combination that can be won when a minor combination C group is won, which will be described later.

The small combination C1 table is used in the game when the small combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the reel 31 is stopped at the first left (when the pressing order is correct), the small combination 02 is stopped on the effective line, and the left is stopped. Except for the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the single hand included in the winning hand (when winning the small hand C1, any of the small hand 03 to 10) is stopped on the effective line. It defines the stop position of the reel 31 .

When winning the small winning combination C1 (the same goes for small winning combinations C2 and C3, which will be described later), if the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 (three-hand winning combination) will be won in the same way as when the small winning group B is won, with priority given to the number of sheets. Control. The combination of symbols corresponding to the small win 02 is, as shown in FIG. . Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small winning combination C1 is won, if the pressing order is incorrect (in the middle or right first stop), control is performed so that one-piece winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) is awarded based on the number priority. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols for the small wins 03 to 10 is a combination of "Bell A" or "Bell B" symbols on each reel 31. FIG. Furthermore, among the combinations of symbols of the small wins 03 to 10, all the reels 31 have 4 "Bell A" and 4 "Bell B", and either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is selected. Even if it is stopped, it satisfies the condition of number priority. In particular, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively. Further, in all the reels 31, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols. Therefore, any one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 can always be won.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, if the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 (3 pieces) wins ("PB = 1"), and if the pressing order is incorrect, one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 (1 ("PB=1") is won ("PB=1"), and there is no dropout (stopping of pattern symbols) as in the case of winning the small win group B.

The small combination C2 table and the small combination C3 table used when the small combination C2 is won and when the small combination C3 is won are the same as the small combination C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small win C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct pressing order, and when the small win C3 is won, the right first stop is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combination 03 to 10 is the same as when the small winning combination C1 is won, so the explanation is omitted.

Therefore, there is a single hand (small hand 03 to 10) that can be stopped if the pushing order is incorrect when winning the small hand group B, and a single hand that can be stopped when the pushing order is wrong when the small hand group C is won ( Small wins 03-10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine which of the small win group B or the small win group C has been won in the game only by seeing the wins of the small wins 03-10.

The small combination D table is used in a game when the small combination D is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small combination 35 is stopped on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 . In the small combination D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is irrelevant. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of symbols for the small winning combination 35 is "watermelon". “Watermelon” has a “PB≠1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB=1” arrangement on the right reel 31 . Therefore, in a game using the small combination D table, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the "watermelon" stops on the activated line, the "watermelon" will stop on the activated line on the left and middle reels 31. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line and the small win 35 is lost.

The small winning combination E1 table is used in a game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated for left or middle first stop, so-called middle stage cherry stop type ("cherry" stops at left middle stage). It defines the stop position of the reel 31 . On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the right first stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle stage cherry does not stop.

The winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combinations 36 and 38 (and the small winning combination 37 when winning the small winning combination E2, which will be described later). The number/number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by predetermined arbitrary stop control. Therefore, control is performed so that the winning of the small winning combination 36 is prioritized during the left or middle first stop, and the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized during the right first stop.

In FIG. 5, the "cherries" on the left reel 31 are No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 ("PB≠1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left row, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped in the effective line, which is the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbols related to the small win 36 are stopped for the left reel 31 .

For example, when the number 7 "red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage ("cherry" stop at the middle left stage) at the first stop on the left, "blue 7" or "cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The line is stopped ("PB=1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" ("PB= 1”) to stop on the valid line. As a result, the small winning combination 36 is won. Also, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the 2nd or 12th "blank" is stopped at the lower left stage ("Cherry" is stopped at the middle left stage), similarly to the above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the " Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7" or "Blank" is stopped on the effective line. . As a result, the small winning combination 36 is won.

Stop control is performed in the same manner as described above for the middle first stop. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have "PB=1" and the symbols related to the small win 36 stop, and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop ( "PB≠1"). However, at the first stop on the left or middle, "Red 7" or "
If "Blank" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped at "PB=1". In this case, the stopping form is "Bell A/Bell B"-"Blue 7/Cherry"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank", and 38 small wins are won.

On the other hand, in the game using the small winning combination E1 table, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized during the right first stop. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Blue 7/Cherry" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" stops, and the small combination 38 wins with "PB=1". . Furthermore, at the first stop on the right, even if it is possible to stop "Cherry" in the middle left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell A" is not stopped in the middle left stage, and "Bell A" or "Bell A" is displayed in the lower left stage. B" (in this case, "Cherry" non-stop on the middle left row).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in a game when the small winning combination E1 is won. It defines the stop position of Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the left first stop, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped in the lower left row (at the time of middle row cherry stop), "Replay" is set to the effective line for the middle reel 31 It may be stopped (“PB=1”), and for the right reel 31, either “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7” or “blank” may be stopped. As a result, the small winning combination 37 wins. If the stop control is performed in this manner, it becomes possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is stopped.

The small combination F table is used in a game when the small combination F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small combination 01 to 39 on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined. In this embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation. In addition, the small win F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of coins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. As a result, the small winning combination 39 is always won. On the left reel 31, the sum of the two symbols of "Cherry" or "Bell C" is "PB=1", so the small combination 39 wins with "PB=1".

The small combination G table is used in a game when a small combination G is won, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small combination 40 on the effective line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small winning combination 40 consists of a combination of symbols arranged at "PB=1" for all the reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used in a game when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (single 1BBA is won), or when 1BBA is won in the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the stop control of the reels 31 is performed. Within the range of , the combination of symbols when the reels 31 are stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the activated line and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination other than 1BBA is not stopped on the activated line. It is a thing. Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all the reels 31 (PB≠1), "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the effective line without eye pressing.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used in the game when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (single win of 1BBB), or when 1BBB was won in the previous game and the game is not won in the current game. Within the range of stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than 1BBB is not stopped on the activated line. It defines the combination. The symbol of 1BBB is "PB≠1" on all reels 31 as well as 1BBA, so "Red 7" and "Black 7" cannot be stopped on the effective line without eye pressing.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and a small winning combination or replay were won repeatedly, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and a small winning combination or replay was won in the game this time, the following stop control is performed. is mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the symbols of the winning 1BB and the small win or replay on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning small win There is a stop control that gives priority to stopping symbols of a winning combination or a replay on an activated line. It should be noted that the stop control for stopping both the symbols of 1BB and the small combination or replay on the effective line is up to the second stop, and at the time of the third stop, control is performed so that 1BB, or the small combination or replay is won, and multiple No role may be won more than once. Secondly, priority is given to stopping both symbols of the winning 1BB and the small combination or replay on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning 1BB. stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol on the activated line.

Thirdly, although the priority is given to stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbols on the active line, when stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbols on the active line, When the winning 1BB symbols can be stopped on the effective line at the same time, there is a stop control to stop them at that position.

In addition, when 1BB ("PB ≠ 1") and a small combination or replay of "PB = 1" are duplicated (when they are elected at the same time), the winning 1BB pattern and the small combination or replay It is not necessary to stop both symbols and symbols on the active line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the symbols of the small win of "PB=1" or the replay symbols are stopped on the active line. Therefore, since the small wins E1 and E2 are "PB=1", when 1BBA and the small win E1 of this embodiment are won, or when 1BBB and the small win E2 are won, only the small win E1 or E2 It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

Returning to FIG. When the reels 31 are stopped, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reels 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination (whether any combination has won a prize). or not). The winning judgment means 66 judges the symbols on the pay line by detecting the angle of the motor 32 when it is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

When the prize determination means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reels 31 are stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 wins the winning combination. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. Also, when winning a prize in replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied in each game when all the reels 31 are stopped, and controls to perform the RT transition when determining that the RT transition condition is satisfied. It is. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in this embodiment. RT of this embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game), as described above. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the type (number) of lottery condition devices and the winning probability differ for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of full stop (when all the reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbols stop when all the reels 31 stop, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time when all the reels 31 stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game in which 1BB was won. good too. In this embodiment, the game proceeds to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB is not won in the game in which 1BB is won.

Non-inside games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Also, the internal middle game corresponds to RT4. In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is controlled to basically stay at RT3, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc., the player may stay at RT2. be. In the case of an advantageous section ending with only one instruction function activating game (excluding games won in small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one indication function activation game (excluding games won in small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C) may be performed, and the advantageous section may end. Of course, you may make it stay in RT3 fundamentally.

In the non-RT, non-inside games of RT1 to RT3, a lottery for the accessory condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the conditions for shifting to RT are satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to an internal middle game. Also, when 1BB is won in a game in which 1BB is won, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is completely stopped, so RT4 (internal middle game) is not passed in this case.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has been won in RT4, it determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively. When 1BBA is in operation, it continues until the 1BBA operation end condition is met. In this embodiment, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to the number of payouts exceeding 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during the operation of 1BBA every game, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the condition for ending the 1BBA operation is set. is determined to be satisfied, and control is made to shift to non-RT from the next game.

1BBB operation is similar to the above. If the transition is made during 1BBB operation, it continues until the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, the end condition of 1BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals. The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when determining that more than 200 medals have been paid out, determines that the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied, From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Note that replays are not included in the count of 150 or 200 shots during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during 1BB operation, replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, the number of games during 1BB operation increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games in the middle.

During operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, RB is continuously operated as described above. The RB ends when either winning two hands or playing two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is activated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during 1BBA is set higher at setting 6 than at setting 1. The number of coins to be paid out when the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 is won is two. This will
With setting 6, the number of games played until reaching the end condition (exceeding 150 cards) during one BBA operation is greater than with setting 1. Therefore, during 1BBA operation in the advantageous interval, setting 6 has a higher expected value for winning replay D than setting 1, so the probability of winning the advantageous interval increases. The details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section, which will be described later.

When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, not limited to this, RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

The RT control means 68 continues the non-RT until the pattern design is displayed in the non-RT. In the non-RT mode, a small winning combination B group is drawn, and if one of the small winning combinations B is won and the winning small winning combination is lost, a pattern pattern is displayed. The RT control means 68 determines that the condition for transition to RT is satisfied when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, and shifts to RT2 from the next game. In RT1, RT1 is maintained until a pattern design is displayed like non-RT. Then, when the pattern design is displayed at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the replay B group is won and the replay 02 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3. On the other hand, in RT3, pattern symbols are displayed, or replay C group is won, and replay 03 is continued until winning. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT shift condition is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

As described above, in the normal section (and in the non-internal section), most people go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but RT2 has the highest stay rate in probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game is shifted to RT4 (inside).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, an instruction function is provided when the replay C group is won. to display the order of pressing correct answers for winning Replay 01. This prevents falling to RT2. In addition, when the small winning combination B group is won, the order of pressing the correct answer for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the minor winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the minor winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to win replay 02 by activating the instruction function as described above and activating the instruction function when the replay B group is won. Display the pressing order and control to shift to RT3. Also, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, the transition to the advantageous section is made even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern design is displayed, the instruction function is operable (for example, when winning a small winning combination B group), the instruction function is not operated and the pattern symbols are displayed. Then, pattern symbols are displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when shifting to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

Advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination as to whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition during the advantageous section, operation control of the indicating function, and the like. be. First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and non-inside game. In addition, the advantageous interval control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous interval in the advantageous interval and non-inside game.

Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Decide to move. Also, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, it is limited to non-internal driving, and it is not decided to shift from a normal section to an advantageous section during internal driving.

In addition, as described above, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the combination lottery result (the winning condition device), the winning of the condition device having a set difference cannot be the condition. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section under the condition that the common setting condition device is won.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, there are cases where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number included in the range of "20" among the numbers "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA is extracted, it is decided to move to the advantageous section, and the number "10" When a random number within the range of is extracted, it is decided not to move to the advantageous section. The same applies to single winning of "1BBA+small win D", "1BBA+small win E1", and small win E1.

In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that it is also possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section when winning one of these conditional devices, or to perform a lottery as to whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in this embodiment, for simplification of explanation, the addition of the advantageous section is performed uniformly.

When it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, an advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the number of games played, the end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the difference number, the number of times a small win group B is won, the number of times the instruction function is operated, etc.) may be set. good. In this embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the game moves to the advantageous section in which the end conditions are set as follows. Specifically, for example, it can be defined as follows. When 1BBA wins alone (set number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games When 1BBA + small combination D wins multiple times (set number "5"): Initial value is 1BB Count after the end of the game and shift to the advantageous section of 250 games When 1BBA + small hand E1 double winning (number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of the 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When the role D is won alone (set number “50”): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When small combination E1 is won alone (set number “250”): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small combination Either one of the advantageous sections that ends with the operation of the instruction function when winning the B group (which one to choose may be determined by lottery. When extracting the random number value, the initial value is the advantageous interval of 100 games, and when extracting the random number value included in the range of the set number "130", the instruction function at the time of winning one small win group B It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the probability of winning the small winning combination D is lower than the winning probability of the small winning combination E1, in order to give a sense of premium when winning the small winning combination D, the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination D is set to a small number. It is set more than when winning the role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination E1 may be set higher than when winning the small winning combination D. Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by "30", ), the number of games is increased by 50, and when a small winning combination E1 is won alone (set number is 750), the number of games is increased by 20, and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of "1/4" ("250" out of "1000") when a small winning combination E1 is won alone. do. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, setting 6 is set higher than setting 1 for the single winning probability of small combination E2.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries. In other words, the player can be given the impression that there is a set difference even though there is no set difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section. Contrary to the present embodiment, setting 1 may be higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of small winning combination E2 in FIG. In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability that the transition to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears will be made. In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 is won alone in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle cherries. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no set difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination in which winning numbers are set in common (except when 1BBA and small combination D are double-won), and 1BBB is a special combination in which winning numbers are different. In this case, when the common 1BBA is won during the advantageous interval and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous interval can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB with a set difference is won in the advantageous section and 1BBB is in operation, it is determined that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. When 1BBA and a small combination D having a set difference in the advantageous section are repeatedly won and 1BBA is in operation, it is determined that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a lower winning probability of minor win A than setting 1, and setting 6 has a lower winning probability of minor win E2 than setting 1. higher than For this reason, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to a payout exceeding 150 coins, so that setting 6 has a larger number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation than setting 1. - 特許庁So, for example, if you set it to add an advantageous section when winning Replay D, the expected value of the number of times you win Replay D during 1BBA is higher with setting 6 than with setting 1, so the higher the setting Advantageous sections can be easily added.

Furthermore, during the operation of 1BBA, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section may be added. As described above, during 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is greater with setting 6 than with setting 1. As described above, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to the fact that more than 150 coins have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during one BBA operation is about "8.664" at setting 1 and about "8.557" at setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of times the game is played at which the number of payouts reaches 150 is approximately "17.3" for the setting 1 and approximately "17.5" for the setting 6. Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is unconditionally determined to add an advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add an advantageous section. be able to. Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added each time a certain number of games have been played. Also in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section while 1BBB is in operation. Also, as shown in FIG.
After the operation of BBA is completed, the game moves to non-RT, and when it moves to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until a pattern design is displayed, and when the pattern design is displayed, it shifts to RT2. That is, after the end of the operation of 1BBA, it does not go through RT1.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, it shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern design is displayed. In RT1, replay E is drawn by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when replay E is won. As a result, after the 1BBB operation ends, the probability of adding an advantageous section becomes higher than after the 1BBA operation ends. By setting the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the operation of 1BBA and after the operation of 1BBB is completed.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is made, the instruction function is not operated in a game in which the instruction function can be operated (for example, when winning the minor winning group B) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is not operated. Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern design is displayed in RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When moving to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, by activating the instruction function when the small winning group B is won, the small winning combination 01 wins (unless there is a pushing order error) pattern. No pattern is displayed. Therefore, when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to make the player stay in RT1 until the advantageous section ends. A game ( For example, when winning a small winning combination of B group, the instruction function may not be activated and the player may wait until the pattern symbols are displayed.

Further, when it is determined to shift from a normal section to an advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before a predetermined timing arrives. section or standby section), control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished. Firstly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls that after the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section is completed (when all the reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, medals The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until it becomes possible to insert (bet) medals in the next game (after payout), and before the operation of the settlement switch 46 (calculation processing operation) becomes possible when there are stored medals. to control.

Secondly, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device including 1BB that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops, Control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Therefore, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB, for example. If there is, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (limited to the case where a waiting section is provided).

On the other hand, if the special role is a special role such as SB or CB where the winning is valid only in the winning game and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the winning of the condition device including only the small winning combination and the replay is possible. Based on this, it is necessary to light up the advantageous interval display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (betting) becomes possible and the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable. be.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 . In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set as follows: "From the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 stops and the medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) after the medals are paid out if there is a payout, and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as "predetermined timing"). )”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in this embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game unknowingly after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example of this case. In this example, when the minor winning combination E1 is won (single) and it is determined to shift to the advantageous interval based on the winning of the minor winning combination E1, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, it is always applied when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later in the winning information.

Secondly, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device including 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 for the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In this embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, when 1BBA and a small winning combination E1 are repeatedly won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this overlapping winning, the advantageous section is displayed by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. LED 77 is lit. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, it may be the lighting timing before that, for example, the timing 1 (when there is no waiting section).

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes the special role that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is uniformly displayed. It may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when the section is displayed. Alternatively, even if it is a transition to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes the special role, it has been decided to uniformly move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include the special role. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing in the same manner as when.

Alternatively, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of a conditional device including a special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information can be transferred to the advantageous section other than timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example, In the next game of the game in which the special role is won, when the start switch 41 is operated, while at least a part of the reels 31 are rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the particular role is won), etc. may be

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the waiting section ends in the next game of the game in which the special role is won). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated after the next game of the game in which the special role is won, in the game in which the special role can be won, at least a part of the reels 31 rotates. It may be during operation, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will start (the standby section will end with the game that has made it possible to win the special combination) ).

Here, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the 59th "red 7"-"cherry"-"red 7" (FIG. 9) of the 36 small winning combinations can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that ``Red 7'' - ``Rotating'' - ``Red 7'' has stopped as a result of pinching in the game when 1BBA is won. Next, when the player aims for "cherry" when the middle reel 31 stops, but "cherry" does not stop on the effective line (kicking control), the small winning combination E1 is won in the game. I know it's not. In this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player will know that 1BBA is single winning, and the 1BBA symbol will be displayed in the next game after the game at the time of 1BBA winning. It becomes possible to highlight the combination of In other words, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as notification of the winning of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section when losing (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, there is a tendency to perform continuous effects (effects to incite whether 1BB is won or not), and then to announce 1BB wins, but the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off by a predetermined timing. If the lights are turned on, such a continuous effect will be wasted. Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BB wins. to have

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA+small winning combination E1", if the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, 1BBA is not won in the relevant game. On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a waiting section cannot be provided). ). Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 will be displayed. When winning a prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been won more than once.

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small win E1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23) and a predetermined A case (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed is provided. Which one to adopt is, for example, sorted by the set number at the time of winning "1BBA + small hand E1", or when winning "1BBA + small hand E1" (limited to when it is decided to move to the advantageous section) The advantageous section For example, a lottery (two-step lottery) as to whether or not the display LED 77 should be turned on immediately (whether or not a waiting section should be provided) may be performed. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA is not repeatedly won, and the expectation of the player can be continued.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB=1", so regardless of whether "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won or when the small winning combination E1 alone is won, the A small winning combination E1 (small winning combination 36 or 38) is won in the game. However, it is also possible to set the minor winning combination included in the conditional device of the minor winning combination E1 to "PB≠1". Then, when the small winning combination included in the conditional device for the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB≠1", when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won, the small winning combination E1 When a prize is won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by a predetermined timing, but when the minor win E1 is not won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit even after the predetermined timing has passed.
It is also possible to control

However, not limited to the above, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always displayed by a predetermined timing. may be turned on (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be always turned off even after a predetermined timing has passed (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the small winning combination D is won alone and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, it is necessary to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). Therefore, it becomes a so-called immediate announcement and cannot arouse the player's expectations. Therefore, as described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, there are two advantages: an advantageous interval that continues until a predetermined number of games are played, and an advantageous interval that ends with the operation of the instruction function when one small winning combination B is won. set the type. Then, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, until the first small win group B is won, an effect that raises expectations (as a final result, whether or not the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games are played) If a continuous effect indicating whether or not the game is to be played is output, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to arouse the expectations of the player even after that. This is because, even if the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up, it is not known at the time when the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights whether the advantageous interval will continue until the predetermined number of games is played.

Even when the small win E1 is won alone, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up when the advantageous section is not transitioned to, so there is no need to output a continuous effect (such as an effect asking whether or not to transition to the advantageous section). do not have. In addition, when the condition device is won, instead of setting the winning of the small winning combination B once (one instruction function operating game) or the predetermined number of games, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B is set. It is also possible to determine the number of times of actuation by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by performing an OR operation on segment data up to that point and "10000000" may be stored in the RWM 53 as new data. As a result, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to segment DP becomes "1".

Further, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment are provided with a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and the method of lighting these digits includes the following control. The main control board 50 executes an "interrupt process" every 2.235 ms in parallel with the "(game progression) main process" which is a process that is repeated every game. In this interrupt processing, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission processing, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, dynamic lighting is executed for digits 1 to 9 by lighting one digit for each interrupt process. For example, only digit 1 is lit in the current interrupt process, and digit 2 is lit in the next interrupt process. By repeating this, one digit is lighted at a rate of once in nine interrupt processes. In addition to such dynamic lighting, static lighting may be performed by connecting a signal line for each digit.

Therefore, the segment data is changed as described above when the timing for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 comes. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes due to interrupt processing.

In addition, the advantageous interval control means 69 activates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 to be described later in the game in which the instruction function should be activated during the advantageous interval. The push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78 . For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1". This control corresponds to "activation of the instruction function" in this embodiment.

1) Non-RT and RT1: When a minor win group C is won (When a minor win group B is won, the pattern pattern is to be displayed, so the pointing function is not activated.) 2) RT2: When replay group B wins, when minor win group B wins, and when minor win group C wins 3) RT3: When replay wins group C, when minor win group B wins, and when minor win group C wins .

Furthermore, as described above, when the minor winning combination A is won, the indicating function is operated as a dummy. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 is won regardless of the pressing order. shall not prejudice the fairness of Specifically, when winning the small winning combination A, any one of the pushing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" may be selected by lottery using random numbers or the like.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won while the upper limit of the advantageous interval is approaching, the advantageous interval control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of right first stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the middle stage cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching.

In this embodiment, when the minor winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is added, and when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the advantageous interval is not added. , showing the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not shown. In particular, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is always added, so that the display of the cherry in the middle stage can give the player the impression that the advantageous interval is added. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the cherry in the middle row in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

In addition, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the display of the cherry in the middle row, the winning of either the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is performed. Also, by operating the indication function, the right first stop is displayed and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous section is set to "1500 games". For this reason, for example, when the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section reaches "1400 games" or more and the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won, the right first stop is displayed by activating the instruction function. . As described above, the "operation of the instruction function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the instruction function". Of course, the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23 without including such a case in the "operation of the instruction function".

In this embodiment, an advantageous interval counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of times games are played in the advantageous interval (see FIG. 1). The advantageous interval counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval. Then, the count value is decremented each time one game is played, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section is terminated. Incidentally, the decrementation may be performed from the game shifted to the advantageous section, or may be performed after the 1BB game is finished. Further, the advantageous interval counter 69a does not need to set the initial value of the number of games determined at that time (for example, "100") when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval, and after the 1BB game ends, An initial value may be set. Furthermore, when an advantageous section is added to an advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a is "55", it is decided to add an advantageous interval, and when the number of games added is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to " 85”. Then, each time one game is played, the number is decremented by one game, such as "84", "83", and so on.

In addition, when 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small combination D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a interrupts counting by The reason for this setting is that in this embodiment, during 1BBA operation (excluding those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small hand D), it is possible to add an advantageous section, but during 1BBB operation, the advantageous section is allowed to be added. Since the addition is not executed, the above setting is made in order to balance both (so that the player is not more disadvantageous during 1BBB operation in the advantageous section than during 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous interval counter 69a may continue to count during either 1BBA or 1BBB operation, or the advantageous interval counter 69a may continue counting during either 1BBA or 1BBB operation. Counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous interval, the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside). It should be noted that when 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a is interrupted when the 1BB is won, the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval displayed on the image display device 23 is displayed until the 1BB is announced. , may be decremented one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section (such as duplicate winning of 1BBA and minor hand E1), and the transition to an advantageous section is made based on the winning of this condition device. In this case, the waiting section starts from the next game (limited to the case where the waiting section is provided), and it is inside 1BB. On the other hand, when a conditional device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won, it is in the advantageous section and inside the 1BB, and the advantageous section is not added during the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if you have won a conditional device that includes 1BB in the normal section and have not yet moved to the advantageous section due to the transition to the standby section, a longer fan effect (Notify whether or not you have won 1BB It is considered that outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games, for example, is not so disadvantageous to the player. This is because the waiting section is not an advantageous section, so counting (decrementing) by the advantageous section counter 69a and counting (decrementing) by the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, are not performed. On the other hand, if you win a condition device that includes 1BB in the advantageous section and become internal, even after becoming internal, the advantageous section counter 69a will continue to count (decrement) and the upper limit counter 69b will be described later. is counted (decremented). In this case, since an advantageous section cannot be added, it is preferable to promptly announce the winning of 1BB without performing an unnecessarily long fan effect. Specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former fanning effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games of the latter fanning effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small winning combination E1 is won singly, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated when the minor winning group B is won once, the advantageous section counter 69a counts. Don't set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a, the advantageous interval continues until the minor combination B group is won. Then, when the minor winning group B is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous interval in the current game is satisfied, and the advantageous interval is terminated.

When the number of operations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning group B is provided in advance as the end condition of the advantageous interval, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small winning group B is provided, and this counter is used. May be set to "1". Then, when the instruction function is activated once when the small winning group B is won, the count value becomes "0", and it can be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.

By providing something like an advantageous section flag and setting it to "on" during the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. However, in this embodiment, the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 plays the role of the advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied in the current game, or when the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a becomes "0", the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is "0". ” is executed.

In addition, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section with a fixed number of games, or by activating the instruction function at the time of winning one small winning combination B group. A lottery will be held to decide whether to transition to an advantageous section that will end (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, it is arbitrary how to allocate probabilities between the former and the latter.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect is output indicating which advantageous section has been shifted to. (The game may be continued until the small win group B is won). Next, when a minor winning group B is won, after activating the instruction function in the relevant game, if it is an advantageous section that ends with one activation of the instruction function, the advantageous section ends with this game (advantageous section). section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when transitioning to the advantageous interval for the predetermined number of games, the advantageous interval is continued after the next game (the advantageous interval display LED 77 is kept lit). In the above example, it is assumed that the small win group B is won before the predetermined number of games has been reached from the start of the advantageous section.

In addition, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous interval starts (sets "1500" when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval or at the start of the advantageous interval). The count value is decremented by "1" for each game without interrupting the count until the interval ends. Also, for example, the count is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. Note that the advantageous interval counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous interval control means 69 controls the advantageous interval in the game this time ( (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to "0"), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished (the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is updated to "0"). Thus, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous interval, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous interval ends even if 1BB is in operation.

Also, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum number of payouts for the prescribed number of 3). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Even if the instruction function activating game is not executed when the group is won, or even if the small win group B is not won even once, the advantageous interval is (forcedly) ended in the current game and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is displayed. turn off the Also, the number of remaining games or the number of completed games may be displayed on the image display device 23 by referring to the values of the advantageous interval counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits external signals to the external centralized terminal board 100 . This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, the end of 1BB operation, and the like. The main control board 50 executes a game end check process every game, and updates the external signal control number at the time of the game end check process. The "external signal control number" in this embodiment is a number that takes a different value according to the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, and the end of 1BB operation.

Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. After updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits the external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52 . When this external signal is input to the external common terminal board 100 , it is transmitted to the hall computer 200 . The external signal is then output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 . A control command consists of, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of a first control command and a second control command. Furthermore, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, if the control command indicates RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Also, the parameter of RT is "00000001 (B)" in this embodiment when it is RT1, for example. Therefore, the 2-byte data "00110011/00000001" ("/" indicates the space between the first control command and the second control command and is not actually present) is the RT control command. , is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 . As for the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the performance group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data, and the second control command is RWM53 as in the above RT. is the data stored in

Note that the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80 . This is because, for example, when winning the push order bell, there is a risk that the correct push order will be known based on the winning and replay conditions device number due to fraudulent activity. On the other hand, there is no risk of fraudulent activity as described above with respect to the accessory condition device number. Therefore, for example, when winning 1BBA, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

Further, when a conditional device having a correct pressing order is won during an advantageous section, a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when a conditional device that does not have a correct pressing order is won during an advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number is neither acquired nor stored in the RWM 53 . Here, at the start of each game, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is "A0". Therefore, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the RWM 53 is "A0" except when the conditional device having the correct pressing order is won in the advantageous section. Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if a conditional device having the correct pushing order is won, the pushing order instruction number is neither acquired nor stored in the RWM 53 .

Then, when a conditional device having a correct pressing order is won in an advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits a pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 . Also, except when a conditional device having a correct pressing order is won during an advantageous period, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information of "A0" as a pressing order instruction number. Furthermore, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the pushing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when it is not in the advantageous section. It is also conceivable that the control command transmitting means 71 uniformly transmits the pressing order instruction number of "A0" when it is not in the advantageous section. The number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91 . As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls each control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, the pushing order instruction number, the effect group number, the accessory condition device number, and the like. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how the lamp 21 is lit, blinked or extinguished) , what kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.) are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the obtained number, the number of games played (the number of remaining games or the number of completed games), etc. are displayed as images. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small winning combination B1 in a game in an advantageous section and receiving a control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", the correct pressing order "left first stop" or "1-○" is received. −○”, etc., which allows the player to easily know the order of pressing the correct answer. It should be noted that when the pressing order instruction number of "A0" is received during the advantageous section, the pressing order is not reported.

Furthermore, the control command for the effect group number does not contain information about which condition device is actually won, but it can be said that it contains rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to the performance group number "5" is received, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, or the small winning combination group C is won. . However, it is possible to know whether any of the small winning combination A, the small winning group B, or the small winning group C is won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a "bell" pattern or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow" corresponding to "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before is operated. On the other hand, when winning the small win group B or small win group C during the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect can be performed at the time when the winning of the small win 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after operating the second stop switch 42 or after operating the third stop switch 42 .

However, if there is a difference between the output timing of the effect when the minor win A is won and the output timing of the effect when the minor win group B or the minor win group C is won, based on the difference in timing, the minor win A will be displayed. Since it is possible to determine whether the player wins or wins the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group, the number of winning times of the small winning combination A can be counted, and the set value can be estimated. Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the pressing order is correct when the small winning group B or the small winning group C is won, for example, immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, or the small winning combination group C is won. In particular, in this embodiment, when winning any of the small win A, the small win group B, or the small win group C, a control command corresponding to the same effect group number "5" is transmitted. . In this way, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are set to be the same ("5"), and the sub-control board 80 that receives the effect group number operates, for example, the first stop switch. If it is designed so that the effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are set to be different ("5" to "7"). (In the latter case, when any of the effect group numbers "5" to "7" is received, the effect is output at the timing immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated, for example. It is inefficient because it must be designed to

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command for the push order instruction number, effect group number, and accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (operation of the instruction function on the main side). )) and notification of the order of pressing the correct answer by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub-side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4. FIG. In FIGS. 24 and 25, first, when the player operates the start switch 41, the combination lottery means 61 draws a lottery for the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Also, when it is in the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a control command for the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the performance group number, and the accessory condition device number. The sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pushing order based on the received pushing order instruction number when it is in the advantageous section. On the other hand, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number by operating the instruction function during the advantageous section.

In "Example 1" of FIG. 24, when the pressing order instruction number is determined, first, the pressing order instruction information is displayed by operating the instruction function of the main control board 50. FIG. After that, the pushing order instruction number is transmitted, and then the production group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, when the accessory condition device number is received, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. Both the display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches a constant rotation speed.

Further, when the correct pressing order is the so-called three options (first stop) as in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order is notified by the image display device 23 when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated. Until On the other hand, for example, when the correct pressing order is the so-called 6 choices, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Even if the correct pressing order is the so-called three options as in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order may of course continue to be notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. be.

In this embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display device 23 terminates the notification of the correct pressing order. Of course, effects other than the order of correct keystrokes, such as image display (character display, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section, can be continued.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the winning number display LED 78 is until the main control board 50 determines the winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct pressing order has three options as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated. After the push order instruction information is displayed, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is "00" (higher digits and lower digits display "0"), "*0" (higher digits are extinguished (*), lower digits are " 0" is displayed), "**" (higher and lower digits are turned off), and "--" (only segment G is turned on for both upper and lower digits).

In "example 2" of FIG. 24, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by operating the instruction function, and then the effect group Send the number and accessory condition device number. The sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order after receiving the performance group number and the accessory condition device number.

In addition, in "Example 3" of FIG. After that, at the moment (or just before) when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the pushing order instruction information. In Examples 1 and 2 above, the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at an earlier timing than the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80 is performed at an earlier timing than the activation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 .

In "Example 4" of FIG. 25, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order at almost the same timing. . When controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after "N" ms has passed since the main control board 50 sent the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80 (press order instruction The sub-control board 80 controls to start notifying the correct pressing order after "N" ms has elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Things are mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . Further, it is preferable that the sub-control board 80 side performs the pressing order notification after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when the main control board 50 transmits an incorrect pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 notifies a pressing order different from the received pressing order instruction number. Even if this is the case, since the main control board 80 has already displayed the push order instruction information, the player will not notice the error in the information given by the sub control board 80, and the player will not suffer any disadvantages. do not have. Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of the pushing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed until the winning judgment is made, but it may be performed until the third reel 31 stops.

Next, a more specific description will be given of the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the notification of the correct pressing order. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the figure), the display of the winning number display LED 78, and the notification example of the image display device 23. In FIG. Note that the example in FIG. 26 is timing corresponding to “Example 1” in FIG. 24 .

In the instruction function activation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 . The example of FIG. 26 shows an example of winning a small winning combination B1. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", that is, "=1". Then, before the reel 31 reaches a constant rotation speed, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example of displaying "1 ◯◯".

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the correct pressing order is selected, the image display device 23 displays the correct pressing order. is output (correct answer). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display of the correct pressing order is erased. In this embodiment, the correct/incorrect pressing order is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42. Therefore, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct pressing order is ended. When there are 6 options, the correct pressing order is continuously notified until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (the display of the pushing order instruction information) continues until the winning determination is made (the same applies to example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached, the operation of the instruction function (the display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. . Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order has three options, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the instruction is given (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order). Activation of the function may be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23 . This is to avoid notification of the pressing order on the sub-control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not activated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be terminated at the same time as the notification by the image display device 23 is terminated, or the operation of the instruction function may be terminated before the notification by the image display device 23 is terminated.

It goes without saying that even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct pressing order. However, if the notification of the pressing order by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all the reels 31 stop, winning determination is performed. Here, when the minor win 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display of the pressing order instruction information "=1". changes to "09" shown. When a one-card winning combination is won due to an error in the pressing order or the like, "01" is displayed, and "00" (or "**") is displayed when the winning combination is lost. In addition, from the display of the push order instruction information "=1" to the display of the number of medals to be paid out "09", "=1" → "00" (in order to reset the display, "00" is displayed) )→“09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, it may be displayed as "=1"→"**" (the upper and lower digits are turned off in order to reset the display)→"09". Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or inserts the medals and bets the medals, the display content is changed to "00" in order to clear the content of the winning number displayed on the winning number display LED 78. ("**" may be used).

In FIG. 1, the management information control means 72 is means for controlling (storing, calculating, displaying, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 . In this embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is as follows: (1) Advantageous section ratio (total) (2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games (total of 15 sets)) (3) Role ratio (6000 games (Total of 15 sets)) (4) Consecutive Accessory Ratio (Total) (5) Accessory Ratio (Total) (see FIG. 38 to be described later).

First, the “advantageous section ratio (advantageous section stay rate)” refers to the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section). percentage). For example, in a game section with the number of games played "10000", when the number of games played in the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70(%)". Also, in this embodiment, one set is defined as "400" games. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the number of "6000" games is set as the "total", and each ratio at the number of "6000" games is calculated.

Furthermore, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the count is aimed at reaching at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the total value is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the number of games is more than "175000", the total value is displayed by, for example, lighting display. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of won medals when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of won medals. Therefore, in this embodiment, "refers to the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired. When the number of medals obtained at the time of operation of "things (RB)" is "500", the "continuous role ratio (6000 games)" is "25 (%)".

In addition, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Here, the "accessories" are, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB), 2BB (second-class continuous operation device, CB is continuously operated), SB (single bonus) is included. In this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the character ratio is the same value as the continuous character ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modified example of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. FIG. In the figure, a four-digit numerical value beginning with "F" indicates the address of the RWM 53. FIG. A 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to advantageous sections. As information on the advantageous interval, there are three storage areas for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval, the total number of games played, and the advantageous interval ratio. The storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous section ratio is 1 byte ("F008").

In this embodiment, the total number of games played is updated so that the value of the total number of games played is incremented by "1" each time one game is completed. On the other hand, during the advantageous interval, every time one game is completed, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of games played in the advantageous interval by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval") is updated. Therefore, a 3-byte storage area is provided for the total number of games played, and a 4-byte storage area is provided for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

This embodiment aims to store at least "175000" times or more as the total number of games played. This is for displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio when the total number of games played is "175000" or more. Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

Also, when it is assumed that all of the total number of games "175000 (D)" is an advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "175000 x 100" (D), and this value is "25 digits" in binary. , 3 bytes of "24" digits are insufficient, but 4 bytes of "32" digits can be stored. For the above reasons, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes.

As for the total number of games played, "1" is added for each game. good too. On the other hand, since the maximum value of the advantageous section ratio is "100 (D)", the value is "7" digits in binary, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is updated every game, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF (H)", about 16,780,000 in decimal), that At this point, the count is terminated, and the number of games played is not updated from the next game. The value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is incremented by "+100" each time one game is played during the advantageous section. It is possible to count up to Then, when the counting of the total number of games is finished, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is also finished.

The advantageous interval ratio is a value calculated by "advantageous interval game number corresponding value/total number of games played" (actually subtracted, not divided, as will be described later). Since the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval is a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous interval by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of this embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. It is possible to calculate by Also, the advantageous section ratio is stored as an integer in this embodiment, and rounded down to the decimal point. For example, when the total number of games is "1100 (D)" and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" contains " 00110010(B)” is stored.

In addition, the advantageous interval ratio can be updated for each game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous interval ratio, the advantageous interval ratio is calculated from the advantageous interval game number corresponding value and the total game number, It may be stored in "F008". Then, a decimal value based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the total number of payouts. When medals are paid out by winning a small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated. As shown in FIG. 28, a ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) consisting of 2-byte data (for example, "F012 (upper digit)" and "F011 (lower digit)"). Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts for 400 games. For example, when a 9-card combination is won and 9 coins are paid out, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of coins paid out. Here, in slot machines under regulations, the maximum number of payouts in one game is set to be "15" or less. becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Furthermore, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when there is a payout, the number of payouts is stored in the 01st set ("F012" and "F011"). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set (“F014” and “F013”). In this way, 400 games are treated as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total number of payouts for 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing the total number of payouts for 15 sets, that is, 6000 games. Assuming that 15 coins have been paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store the value up to "90000 (D)". It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of payouts for the number of games played less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F". Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the number of payouts for the number of 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (2 bytes each), so the total number of payouts for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored. Moreover, it becomes the total value for 6000 games. Next, when the game shifts to the 6001st game, the 01st set of 2-byte data ("F012" and "F011") is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer. go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total number of payouts (3-byte data) for the total of 15 sets is maintained without change.

Then, at the 6400th game, when the addition to the 01st set of 2-byte data is completed, the total number of payouts for 15 sets is calculated (each 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is added), The calculated total payout number for the 15 sets is updated. After the 6401st game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02nd set are cleared in the same manner as described above when the game is shifted to the 6401st game. The total number of payouts up to is stored. In the above method, the total number of payouts for the 15 sets is updated every 400 games. You can update it to that value.

The total payout number (total) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The reason why the total number of payouts is obtained is to calculate each ratio (continuous role product operation ratio, etc., which will be described later) when 175,000 games or more are played. However, this cumulative number of payouts continues to be stored even after 175000 games have been played, and when the storage capacity of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full), the update is terminated. Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game played 175,000 times, the binary number is 22 digits, which can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer in the RWM 53 that stores data regarding the number of payouts related to the continuous bonus. As shown in FIG. 29, a ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is "F043 (most significant digit)" to "F041 (least significant digit)"). .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the payout number of medals by 100 (referred to as "payout number corresponding value") at the time of continuous accessory operation. For example, when a 10-card hand is won and 10 coins are paid out when a continuous role product is activated, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is increased by "+1000". The reason for storing the value multiplied by 100 instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone. This is for the purpose of calculating

Further, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts for continuous accessory operation for 400 games. Specifically, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous accessory operation, the value corresponding to the payout number is stored in the 01st set ("F043" to "F041"). do. From the next 401st game to 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02nd set (“F046” to “F044”). In this way, 400 games are treated as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set. In addition, assuming that 15 medals are paid out every game in 400 consecutive games, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "600000 (D)". can be stored in

In addition, there is provided a storage area (3 bytes) for the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) ("F07
0” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, values corresponding to the number of payouts for 6000 games. In addition, assuming that 15 medals are paid out every game in 6000 games, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "9000000 (D)". Memorable.

For example, up to the first 15th set, "F070" to "F06E" store the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation with the number of games played less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the values corresponding to the number of payouts during the 400th game are stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is the total value for 6000 games. When the game shifts to the 6001st game, the 01st set of 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in the buffer. The corresponding values are stored. Note that, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

Then, when the 6400th game is reached and the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous role product is activated for the total of 15 sets is calculated (Each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated. addition), and updates the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation for the total of the calculated 15 sets.

After the 6401st game, the 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02nd set is cleared in the same manner as above when the game is shifted to the 6401st game, and the 6401st game to the 6800th game 3-byte data of the 02nd set is updated until In the above method, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games. The value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated may be calculated and updated.

The accumulated value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the corresponding value for the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation. is for calculating the continuous accessory actuation ratio when the number of games played is 175,000 or more. However, the accumulated value corresponding to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have been played, and updating is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full). Assuming that 15 medals continue to be paid out every game, "1500 (D)" continues to be added every game, so with 4 bytes, it is possible to store up to about 2.86 million games.

In addition, the continuous bonus action ratio (6000 games) ("F075") is "value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous bonus action in 6000 games ("F070" to "F06E")/total number of payouts in 6000 games (Fig. 28 This is a buffer that stores the values of "F031" to "F02F" in the middle.

In addition, the continuous bonus action ratio (cumulative) ("F076") is "cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous bonus action ("F074" to "F071")/cumulative total payout number (in FIG. 28, "F034 ” to “F032”). The above ratio can be stored in 1 byte since the maximum decimal value "100 (D)" is stored. It should be noted that the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role product operation ratio (total) can be updated every game, but for example, calculation is performed when there is a display request for these ratios. , the calculation result may be stored in each storage area ("F075" or "F076") and the value thereof may be displayed.

FIG. 30 shows a buffer in the RWM 53 that stores data relating to the number of payouts of the bonus. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of paid-out symbols is provided in the same manner as the buffer for storing the corresponding value for the number of paid-out symbols. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of paid-out bonuses and the like has the same configuration as the buffer for storing the corresponding value for the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid-out.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing each 3-byte data as a payout number corresponding value when the role is activated and a payout number corresponding value when the role is activated for a total of 6000 games (15 sets) are stored. It has a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing a value corresponding to the total number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory. Further, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the role product operation ratio, there are two types, one for 6000 games and one for cumulative total. Since the method of storing these data in each buffer is the same as when the continuous role product is activated, the description thereof is omitted.

Incidentally, since the continuous role corresponds to 1BB (including RB) in this embodiment, when medals are paid out during 1BB operation, it is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous role operation shown in FIG. When medals are paid out during the operation of all the accessories including the continuous accessories, the accessory is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of accessory activation shown in FIG. Here, in this embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous role, is provided as the role, so in such a case, the values stored in the buffer shown in FIG. is the same value as the value stored in the buffer shown in .

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the ring buffer, and this example shows a modified example of FIG. In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes each for the 01st set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of 15 sets is stored. On the other hand, the example of FIG. 31 is similar to FIG. 29 in that the total value of 15 sets is calculated, but 16 sets are provided as a ring buffer.

In FIG. 31, from the 1st game to the 6000th game, the values corresponding to the number of payouts are stored in each of the 3 bytes of the 01st set to the 15th set, which is the same as in FIG. Here, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 6000th game is to be calculated, each 3-byte data of the 01st set to the 15th set is added.

Next, the values corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”). Then, when it comes to the 6401th game, the 01st set of 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6401st game to the 6800th game is changed to the 01st set of 3-byte data. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value for the total of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401st game and the 6800th game, each 3-byte data of the 02nd set to the 16th set is added. Furthermore, when the 6800th game is reached, when calculating the payout number corresponding value for the total of 6000 games (15 sets), each 3-byte data of the 1st set to the 15th set is added. In this way, one of the 16 sets of 3-byte buffers is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout number corresponding value for the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 are not initialized only by turning on/off the power switch 11, but are maintained. Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized (at the time of RAM clearing) at the time of setting change, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. be. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 under the condition that the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated to the right by 90 degrees) while the power switch 11 is off. can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change is executed before the setting value becomes changeable (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13 .

However, if an unrecoverable error occurs, the above data will be initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is maintained without being initialized. Here, the "unrecoverable error" refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example, 1) If the read setting value is not within the range of setting 1 to 6 (setting value error), 2) As a result of determining the stop pattern, if a pattern that should not be displayed (kicking pattern) is displayed ( symbol combination error), 3) random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process, 4) when the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, and the like.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data in each buffer in FIGS. 27 to 30, set value information, RT information, winning condition device information) is cleared. Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, the recovery process is performed.

On the other hand, a “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on/off the power switch 11 . For example, medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passage error, path sensor 43a abnormality, insertion sensor 44 abnormality, payout sensor 37 abnormality, medal abnormal insertion error, and the like can be cited. When a recoverable error occurs, the contents of the error are displayed and the main processing is stopped. However, if the hall clerk executes an error cancellation operation (removes the error factor) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is canceled. If it is determined that the error has been resolved, the process is resumed.

Next, the processing for updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played will be described. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is abbreviated as "value corresponding to the advantageous section". FIG. 32 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played using a register. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of the part surrounded by the dotted line, and FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of a part; Also, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played without using a register.

FIG. 32 is executed every game, for example, at the end of the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games played (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played (data "F007" in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower two bytes of the total number of games played (data "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register. Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (data "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (data "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2-byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not overflow has occurred in the lower two bytes of the total number of games due to the addition of "1" in step S105. For example, if the lower 2-byte data is "FFFF(H)" before the start of this flow chart, the addition of "1" in step S105 causes an overflow (flag register (F register) built in the main CPU 55 ) becomes “1”). When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that an overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding "1" in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether or not an overflow has occurred. ”. In this embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set as a carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also called overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the total number of games upper 1 byte register, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the "upper limit" means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games played in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when the 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value becomes "FFFFFF (H)", no more additions can be made. , it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. After "1" is added to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag is "1"). be. Note that this can also be rephrased as when the A register value is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games in this embodiment becomes 3 bytes full, or about 16,780,000 times in decimal, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed for each game, but every game, it is determined "Yes" in step S108, and this flow chart ends.

When proceeding from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. By providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is in progress and judging whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data of digit 2 is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "1". is. When it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval, that is, to the HL register value in this example. Then, in step S111, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred. In this embodiment, since "100 (D)" is added in increments of "100 (D)" during the advantageous section, overflow occurs in two bytes when "FFDC (H) (65500 (D))" is added to "100 (D) )” is added, resulting in “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. When it is determined that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the high-order 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, in step S113, the updated BC register value and HL register value are written to "F004" to "F001" in FIG. As a result, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written to "F007" to "F005" in FIG. As a result, the total number of games played (RWM53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In addition, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section does not become 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, about 16.78 million games can be counted for the total number of games played. This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, in step S112, even if "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, it is possible to realize correct arithmetic processing without judging whether or not an overflow has occurred. is possible, and simplification of arithmetic processing can be realized.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. The processing according to this flow chart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53 . Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in "F007" to "F005" of the RWM 53 remains "FFFFFF (H)". There is no change in the data of the total number of games played.

Next, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. Note that in FIG. 33, when it is determined "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Next, when proceeding to step S123, the total number of games is updated by 3 bytes at once. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written to "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. Note that in FIG. 33, when it is determined "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123. After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S131, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated by 4 bytes at once. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written to "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games played is updated by 3 bytes as in the first specific example.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 35, when "No" is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141. Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even when it is determined in step S109 that the game is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131 and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is not incremented by "100 (D)", but in FIG. , "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples in which the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone are updated via (using) the register. On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example of updating the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone without using the register in principle. In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower two bytes of the total number of games played. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG.

In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, it is determined whether or not the carry flag becomes "1" by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005". It should be noted that the determination may be made based on whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" have become "0000(H)". When it is determined that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F007" in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is whether or not the addition of "1" in step S203 causes overflow to "F007" and the carry flag becomes "1". It is judged that the upper limit has been reached. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the data of "F007" has become "0 (H)", and if it has become "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the total number of games played. When the process proceeds to step S205, the addition in step S203 also causes an overflow in the upper 1 byte, resulting in "0 (H)", so by subtracting "1" from this value, The data before adding "1", that is, "FF(H)" is restored. Next, in step S206, "1" is also subtracted from the lower two bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section, there is no need to update the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of "100(D)" to the RWM 53, the data of "F002" and "F001" are first stored in the HL register. Then, by storing the result of adding the value of "100(D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001", the data of "F002" and "F001" are updated.

In the next step S209, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the calculation of step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and when the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

When it is determined in step S209 that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the processing according to this flow chart ends. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described. In the present embodiment, since the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply "value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section divided by the total number of games". can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only operate with 2 bytes and cannot perform division of numbers of 2 or more bytes. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the subtraction shown below.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section=x and the total number of games played=y, "x/y" can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction. xy=a(>0) ay=b(>0) by=c(>0) cy=d(<0) In this way, the result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y , '>0 (greater than '0')' is '3', so the quotient of 'x/y' can be calculated to be '3'. Further, in the present embodiment, since the numbers after the decimal point are rounded down, the advantageous interval ratio is calculated as "3" in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio. First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in the register. Note that, as in the above case, seven A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are used. In this step S301, each data of "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows. A register: Stores "F007" data D register: Stores "F006" data E register: Stores "F005" data B register: Stores "F004" data C register: Stores "F003" data H register: Stores "F002" data L register: Stores "F001" data

Next, the process proceeds to step S302 to initialize the advantageous section ratio (RWM53). This process clears (sets to "0") the data stored in "F008" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S303 to perform subtraction of the lower byte. This process subtracts the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played) from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section), and obtains the calculation result. Store in HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S304 to determine whether or not a digit has been digitized. If the result of the calculation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value) does not set the carry flag (when the carry flag is not "1"), it is judged "No". If it is determined that the carry flag has been set (there is a digit-down), the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no digit-down, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, the BC register value is "0". If it is "0", the process according to this flow chart is terminated because subsequent subtraction cannot be performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306. In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (upper 1 byte of the total number of games played) is subtracted from the BC register value (upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section), and the result of the calculation is stored in the BC register. Then, proceeding to step S308, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether or not the carry flag is set by the calculation of step S307. When the carry flag is set, it is judged as "Yes" in step S308, and since the subtraction cannot be performed any more, the processing according to this flow chart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined "No" in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309. In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, in step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 to repeat the above process (subtraction). By the above processing, the total number of games played is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous interval ratio calculated from the advantageous interval game count corresponding value and the total game count stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”. As is clear from the above, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" each time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed once. That is, the number of executions (number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

In the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous section by 100) and the total number of games was calculated as the advantageous section ratio (%). By (repeated subtraction), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated. be able to.

Specifically, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory operation for 6000 games (15 sets) ("F070" to "F06E" in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28) , "F031" to "F02F"), the same subtraction as above is repeated to calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation in 6000 games/total number of payouts in 6000 games", and The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games).

In addition, from the cumulative number corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation ("F074" to "F071" in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), " The quotient of "cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation/cumulative total number of payouts" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F076" in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory activation ratio (cumulative).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts in 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28) , the quotient of "the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games/total number of payouts in 6000 games" is calculated, and this value is stored in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the role product activation ratio (6000 games). .

In addition, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated ("F0B4" to "F0B1" in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), the "total The quotient of the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of accessory activation/total total number of payouts" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F0B6" in FIG. 30 as the role product activation ratio (cumulative).

FIG. 38 shows the "advantageous interval ratio", "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", and "continuous accessory ratio" calculated as described above. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of "ratio (cumulative)" and "accessory ratio (cumulative)". These five pieces of information are displayed by information type and numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74 . Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are merely examples, and the information is not limited to these pieces of information. Information only may be displayed. Moreover, the display order is not limited to that shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason for displaying the management information as described above is as follows. Amusement machines that pass the type test stipulated by the Amusement Business Law are permitted to have halls. Here, in the model test, it is determined that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the character ratio and 60% for the continuous character ratio) when 6000 games are played. There are regulations. In addition, at the time of the model test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of the main character and the ratio of the continuous character of the machine is to be attached (in the future, the average value of the advantageous section ratio will also be included). may be requested).

In this case, it is necessary to ensure that hall staff and third parties can easily confirm whether or not the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the one that conforms (whether or not it has been tampered with). It is desired to be For example, there is a possibility that a gaming machine with a numerical value that deviates from the conforming gaming machine may be different from the conforming gaming machine.In this case, request the manufacturer to confirm the gaming machine. Therefore, fraud etc. can be confirmed at an early stage. Therefore, if a function of calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to easily and reliably confirm whether or not there is a match with a suitable one.

In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is thereby turned on), the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is a so-called setting check in progress. Therefore, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . It should be noted that the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated because the setting confirmation is different from the setting change.

In this embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during confirmation of the setting, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, digits 6 and 7 indicate the type of information. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "U7". Also, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is "50(%)", and the digits 7 and 8 are displayed as "50". Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9). When numerical values of management information are displayed, they are expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous Accessory Ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. (%)” is displayed. Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, the display is "Ratio of 6000 games (15 sets)", and "y7" is displayed as the type of this information. )” is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of "consecutive character ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown. Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, the display of "Ratio of characters (total)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is set to "52 (%)". it's shown. Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed. Moreover, the display of the management information may be extinguished when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After turning off the light, pressing the setting switch 13 displays the first display, the advantageous section ratio "U750".

While the door switch 15 detects that the front door is open, the control information continues to be displayed (digits 6 to 9 continue to light), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. At times, digits 6 to 9 may be extinguished. In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on. The advantageous section "U750" may be displayed when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on without illuminating the digits 6 to 9 only when the opening of the front door is detected.

Further, regardless of whether or not opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined period (for example, about every 3 seconds (interrupt processing is performed every 1500 interrupts) is performed. )), the display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74. FIG. Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on a set value such as a continuous accessory ratio. On the other hand, when the hall is open (when players can play), the possibility of opening the front door is high due to a) an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty, b. ) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector, c) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the dispensing port of the hopper 35, d) the hopper 35 is full of medals (hopper Errors that occur when the sub-storage box provided beside the hopper 35 for storing tokens overflowing from the hopper 35 is full (all errors belong to the recoverable errors described above).

If a hall official opens the front door when such an error occurs, there is a risk that the management information will be seen by the player and the set value will be guessed. In order to solve this problem, when all of the above errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not perform lighting display. It is desirable to configure so as to (turn off). It should be noted that the errors are not limited to the above-described errors a) to d), and it is possible to configure the management information display LED 74 not to perform lighting display even when other errors occur. In addition, if the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, the credibility of the management information to be displayed is doubtful. Therefore, it is desirable not to display it.

In order to see the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door open error will always occur. Information may be displayed.

In addition, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6", and "A7" are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by two-digit alphabets, symbols, numerical values, or combinations thereof be able to. In addition, in the above example, different numerical examples are shown for the continuous role material ratio and the role material ratio. becomes.

When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the management information display mode is entered and "U7 (advantageous section Read the segment data displaying "%" and display in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110(B)" and "00100111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of "F008" in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50(D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes "01101101(B)" and "00111111(B)".

Also, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games played ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games played has not reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games played has reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. Thus, the display pattern is varied depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 games".

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, it is displayed in a pattern that repeats turning off and turning on at intervals of "0.5 seconds", or repeating turning off time "0.5 seconds" and turning on time "1 second". It can be displayed in a pattern. Compared to setting the lights-out time and the lights-on time at the same time, setting the lights-on time longer than the lights-out time makes it possible to lengthen the display time of the management information, and the lighting in the hall, etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under certain conditions. It should be noted that the display pattern may be changed so that it can be determined whether or not "175000" games have been played. 175000" games or more), for example, "U1" (less than "175000" games) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the number of games played is less than "175000", "U7" may be flashed and the numerical value may be lit.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games played has not reached "6000" games, the continuous role ratio and the The numerical value of the character ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games played has reached "6000" games, the numerical values of the continuous role ratio and the role ratio are lit and displayed. Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is read, it is determined whether or not "6000" games have been played, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Furthermore, in the same way, when displaying the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and the role ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games played has not reached "175000" games, the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and The numerical value of the character ratio (cumulative) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "175000" games, the values of the continuous role ratio (total) and the role ratio (total) are lit and displayed. Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and the accessory ratio (cumulative), read the value of the total number of games played (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio so that it can be determined whether it is 6000 games or more and whether it is 175000 games or more (by changing the display mode, etc.) , has the following advantages: For example, when judging whether or not the gaming machine is fraudulent based on the currently displayed management information such as the advantageous section ratio, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio, it is necessary to determine how many times the management information has been played. By referring to whether the value is for , it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not the gaming machine is an illegal gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the gaming machine. At this time, for example, when the advantageous interval ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous interval ratio is 80 (%) in 175000 games or more, the judgment of whether or not it is fraud is different. . It is quite possible that the value of the advantageous interval ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in 175000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games played, so it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, it can be determined that the possibility of fraud is high in the latter case.

In this way, even if the value is the same, as the number of games played increases, the numerical value converges to the design value. You can make more accurate decisions. As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is performed, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the lighting display is performed. Conversely, when the total number of games played has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be flashed.

In the above example, digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50, and the management information display LED 74 is provided. It is possible. With this setting, there is no need to separately provide the digits 6 to 9, resulting in cost reduction.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the stored number display LED 76. As shown in FIG. The example of FIG. 39 shows an example of having 9 medals as credits. Therefore, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "09" at first. Even when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, there is no change in the display of the stored number display LED 76 (because the door open error is indicated by the obtained number display LED 78, which will be described later).

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pushed once, the stored number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, after a certain period of time (for example, two seconds) has passed, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio "50" is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pushed next time, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y6" indicating "continuous role product ratio (6000 games)". Then, when the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every two seconds. In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown to move from the display of "50" to the display of "y6". (The same applies to other figures).

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating "accessory ratio (6000 games)", When the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "60" of the "accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, the alternate display of "y7" and "60" is repeated every two seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "A6" indicating the "continuous accessory ratio (total)". , and when the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left as it is, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds. Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "A6" or "48" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "A7" indicating "Ratio of role items (total)". , when the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "52" of the "accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pushed in this state, the display returns to the initial advantageous section ratios "U7" and "50". When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off while the above display is being performed, the display of the stored number is switched to "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78 . The example in FIG. 40 shows an example in which "09" is displayed as the acquired number. Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pushed once, "U7" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, which indicates the advantageous section ratio. Then, after a certain period of time (for example, two seconds) has passed, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio "50" is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error cannot be resolved by simply closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error cancellation operation is performed. For example, the error is cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error cancellation operation is performed in this manner, the acquired number display LED 78 again displays the acquired number "09" before the display of "dE".

In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and the role ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games played "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked.

<Second Embodiment> Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment, the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (the main control board 50B if divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) are always , is lit. There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 in the case of constant lighting. Specifically, "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds)→"y645" (displayed for 5 seconds)→..."A752" (displayed for 5 seconds)→"U750" (displayed for 5 seconds)→... Things are mentioned. A digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. 41, the front door opens/closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with a "front door opening/closing axis" (left side in the figure) as a support axis. Also, although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as that of FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, a power unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a pattern display device including three reels 31, and the like are housed inside the base portion 1. FIG. Further, the sub-control board 80 is attached to the inner left side surface of the base portion 1 . On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 accommodated therein are attached to the inner rear surface of the base portion 1 . Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the pattern display device so that the condition of the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door is opened. In order to do so, it is attached at a relatively easy-to-see position within the base portion 1 . Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the system in which the hopper 35a is automatically replenished with medals when the hopper 35 runs out of medals, the hall clerk opens the front door every time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of replenishing the hopper 35 with medals is known. However, when the front door is opened, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, so that the player can see the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section rate of the machine on which one is currently playing, the continuous accessory rate, and the like. Therefore, there is a risk that the setting values can be guessed based on these values. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is made invisible to the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the board case 16 and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one piece, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment). In FIG. 42(a), the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50, which is different from the first embodiment. In FIG. 41, the opening/closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. , become less visible to the player.

In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. 3B. Although the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, it is located on the left side in the board case 16. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the crimped portion 16a is increased. Assuming that the management information display LED 74 is positioned to the left in FIG. is the right end of the board case 16 . In this way, even if the crimped portion 16a is destroyed to access the main control board 50 (50A and 50B), the management information display LED 74 will not be damaged or damaged when the crimped portion 16a is destroyed. It is possible to prevent more effectively.

The crimped portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is unsealed. may be provided. At this time, when removing the board case 16 from the game machine, it is necessary to destroy the crimped portion of the main body. Even in this case, similarly to the crimped portion 16a, the main body crimped portion is provided at the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the main body crimped portion is destroyed. position (for example, the upper end of the board case 16), the position to provide the management information display LED 74 is a second position away from the first position (for example, the lower part, the right side of the center of the main control board 50 as a reference). side or left).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the crimped portion 16a and/or the main body crimped portion are provided, it is possible to effectively prevent damage or the like of the management information display LED 74. can. Although the crimped portion 16a is positioned at the right end, it is not limited to this, and can be designed at the upper end, for example. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is located at the lower part, the right part, or the left part with respect to the central part of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the crimped part 16a is broken. or damage can be prevented.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible. (1) The upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as 100 times of games. Alternatively, it is possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when either one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) Although the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if existing LEDs can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced. Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamps that indicate the advantageous section must be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 indicates the advantageous section. Can't be a lamp However, even a lamp disguised as a kind of performance lamp can be used as a lamp for indicating an advantageous section as long as the lamp is controlled by the main control board 50 .

Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 of the stored number display LED 76, it may be composed of the segment DP of the digit 4 of the number of acquisition display LED 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging an advantageous section display LED near the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player aware that the advantageous section is in progress at the end of the game. For example, even if the stored number display LED 76 (the segment DP of the digit 2 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77) or the obtained number display LED 78 (the segment DP of the digit 4 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77) near the menu button 25 good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide an advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the adjustment switch 46. FIG. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, by lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, the menu button 25 can be displayed without the player noticing the shift to the advantageous section. can be prevented from operating (displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)).

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous interval control means 69 turns the power on/off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after , the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up again. Therefore, for example, when the hall closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is to be extinguished at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). Things are mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (advantageous section data) of the stored number display LED 76 is also initialized. ”.

(4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is operated in a game in which a conditional device capable of operating the instruction function is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game in which a conditional device capable of activating the instruction function is won during the advantageous section. Advantageous intervals are game intervals in which the operation of the instruction function is “allowed”. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game and the number of times of the instruction function operation game are determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed only for the determined number of games. good too. Even after the number of games is completed, if the conditions for continuing the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to continue to stay in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game again by lottery or the like. is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is based on winning each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). to decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section stores a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation and the value corresponding to the number of payouts during accessory activation are each stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to store the number of games per se and the number of payouts per se without multiplying by 100, depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio. , and is not necessarily limited to storing a value multiplied by 100. Similarly, although the value of the total number of games is the number of games itself, it is not limited to this. number corresponding value) may be stored. In this case, when calculating the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio, the data in the storage area in which the number of games played and the number of payouts are stored are multiplied by 100, and the subtraction process described above is repeated. Calculation is possible by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

(6) The advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory activation ratio, and accessory activation ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games regardless of whether or not management information is displayed, and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You can leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory operation ratio, and the accessory operation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when there is a display request), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and the calculation is performed. You can display the results.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, other switches such as the bed switch 40 may be used instead of the setting switch 13, or a switch dedicated to displaying management information may be provided separately. Also, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable to configure the setting switch and the reset switch from one switch as the setting change/reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change/reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, it is possible to display the management information by operating the setting change/reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same is true when the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14 .

Specifically, when an error is detected, the management information display mode is not entered, and the management information display mode is entered only when no error occurs. For example, among the recoverable errors, when a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. Alternatively, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is being pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. FIG. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, the first management information "U750" is displayed. 9 is extinguished). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information "y645" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be terminated. Even if the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as above is possible.

As described above, there are various variations as to which switch is used to display the management information, and how the relationship between the operation of the switch for displaying the management information and the display pattern (display time) is set. is conceivable, and it is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment. Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display patterns of the management information include: a) a display pattern in which the management information is always displayed; b) when the front door is opened ( c) Pattern for displaying management information when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened and a predetermined switch is operated d) The front door is opened and the setting key is pressed is inserted to turn on the setting key switch 12, and the management information is displayed when a predetermined switch is operated. However, when an operation to shift to the setting change mode is performed and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, the shift to the management information display mode is not performed, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, digit 5 is lit, but digits 6 to 9 are extinguished.

(8) In this embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)"). However, not limited to this, for example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity is not reached. Further, when the total number of games has reached a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared, and counting of the total number of games may be started again. The above is the same for the total payout number.

(9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. Therefore, it is not assumed that the advantageous section ratio will exceed "70" (%) in the market. However, it cannot be denied that the advantageous section ratio may exceed "70" (%), for example, when cheating or the like is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" that stores the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some kind of warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. One example is to make it different from normal (to display that it is abnormal). For example, in the display of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section ratio, the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" are alternately flashed at high speed.

Similarly, when the upper limit of the design value for the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio is set to, for example, "60 (%)", when the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio exceed the upper limit of the design value, some kind of Examples include a method of outputting a warning or displaying the display of the information type in the same manner as described above. Alternatively, the external signal transmission means 70 can be used to transmit information such as the advantageous interval ratio to the hall computer 200, and for example, when the advantageous interval ratio exceeds "70" (%), information related to warning can be sent. mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be "70" (%) or less with respect to all game sections, the rest can be set relatively freely. Further, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than "1/32". Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the indicating function may always be activated when a conditional device capable of activating the indicating function is won. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery to determine whether to activate the function is won. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, choose whether it should be an advantageous section in which the instruction function is always activated, or whether it should be an advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated only when a lottery to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function is won. may be determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (the end of the advantageous section) may be made when a predetermined number of games has been played at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be set. A lottery for shifting (falling) from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the lottery is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, it is unconditionally controlled to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. For example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type "U7" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, the numerical value "50" is displayed, and after that, a predetermined period of time is displayed. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed each time the time elapses.

(12) Advantageous section ratio, continuous role product ratio, and role product ratio are calculated by rounding off decimal places, so accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are respectively the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous character ratio, and the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the character ratio. ). In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio, and role ratio are not limited to the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded up after the decimal point, and the last digit "5" or " Numerical values or the like converted into increments of 10″ may be used.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols to be stopped on the active line is the same when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is won. For example, when a small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, a stop roll of a middle cherry (a winning of a small winning combination of 36) is possible at the first left or middle stop, and a stop roll in which a middle cherry does not appear at the first right stop. (winning a minor role of 38). Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the appearance of the middle stage cherry, it was not possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and E2 was won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cherry in the middle stage is not to appear, instead, the stop roll may be changed. For example, when the minor winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry appears when the first stop is left or middle, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won. make it impossible.

On the other hand, when the minor winning combination E1 or E2 is won, if the right first stop is reached, control is performed in the same manner as described above so that the middle stage cherry does not appear, and instead of not causing the middle stage cherry to appear, the small winning combination E1 or E2 is executed. For example, it is possible to make a stop result appear so that the player can determine which one has been won.

Specifically, for example, the following control can be mentioned. First, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added). When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 is won, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the right first stop.

A combination of symbols for the small combination 41 is, for example, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Replay"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank". As a result, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are different between when the small winning combination 38 is stopped and when the small winning combination 41 is stopped. "Replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31 when the small winning combination 38 stops, but "replay" always stops on the middle reel 31 when the small winning combination 41 stops. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination 38 (small winning combination E1) or the small winning combination 41 (small winning combination E2) is won.

Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination 38 is stopped when the middle cherry winning combination is not stopped when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the small winning combination 41 is stopped when the middle cherry winning combination is not stopped when the small winning combination E2 is won. may In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 has been won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped even at the time of left or middle first stop.

Other methods include, for example, the following methods. The small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also the small winning combination 36, and the small winning combinations 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped. When the small winning combination E2 is won, the small winning combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the right first stop. When the minor winning combination E1 or E2 is won and the small winning combination 38 is lost, the combinations of different symbols are stopped. In this way, it may be determined whether the small win E1 or E2 is won.

(14) When 1BBA+small win E1 is won and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the predetermined timing of the next game is reached, the effect (continuous effect, etc.) indicating whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. is preferred. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so the player knows that the transition to the advantageous section is in progress. However, it is possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not 1BBA (special combination) is won. Also, when it is decided to win 1BBA + small winning combination E1 and to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always not lit even after a predetermined timing (always in the figure At the timing 2) indicated by 23, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the arrival of the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the minor winning combination E1 was won, so that the small winning combination E1 is won alone and the advantageous section is entered. In such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like inciting whether or not the player has won the 1BB.

(15) In the present embodiment, if the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small combination B group, the one-piece combination can be won. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the number of small wins that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect when the small win group B is won may be any number. Furthermore, the dropout rate when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning group B is set to 75% in the present embodiment, but it is not limited to this, and can be set variously such as 50%. Furthermore, it is also possible to set such that even if the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small win group C, the winning combination will be missed with a certain probability as in the case of winning the small win group B.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is set to be larger than that of setting 1. For example, when the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number, it is advantageous. I tried to add the section. However, in contrast to the above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 is smaller than setting 6 by increasing the winning probability of setting 6 for minor hand A and lowering the winning probability of setting 6 for small hand E2. It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section may be added.

(17) In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when a conditional device that does not include a special role that can be carried over, for example, when a small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is displayed by a predetermined timing. We decided to light the section display LED 77 . Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set variously. For example, in the game when the minor winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is finished, when the payout of medals is finished in the game, when the payout of medals is finished.

Also, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which a replay wins, when the automatic bet ends based on the replay win, or the next game (replay) starts For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

(18) When "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won, the small winning combination 36 can be won by operating the stop switch 42 with the left or middle first stop, so the middle stage cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle stage cherry can appear, and when the winning flag of 1BBA is also set, the middle stage cherry does not appear in any pressing order (all small winning combinations 38 are won). Stop control may be performed as follows. When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that when "1BBA+small win E1" is won, even if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the cherry in the middle stage cannot be displayed to arouse the player.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone after reaching the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA+small winning combination E1", so the same stop control as above can be employed. As described above, it is not possible to decide to move to the advantageous section while inside. , I have the impression that I wasted a lot. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherries will not appear at all inside, so that the player will not be given the impression that the player has made a wasteful draw.

In particular, as a combination of symbols for the small win 38, there is "Bell A/Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" (Fig. 11). The pattern 02 "Bell A/Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Bell A/Bell B" is similar. Therefore, by making the combination of the symbols of the minor winning combination 38 appear, it is possible to make it look like a winning combination of the minor winning group B (not to look like a rare winning combination). The above is the same when winning "1BBA + small hand E2", when winning the small hand E1 alone after being in the middle of 1BBB, or when winning the small hand E2 alone after being in the middle of 1BBB is.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, non-RT and RT1 have the same winning probability in replay (set number is "8978"). However, without being limited to this, the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the process is shifted to RT1, a lottery for replay E is performed in RT1, and an advantageous section is added if the replay E is won. However, not limited to this, when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section to an additional specialized zone (a state in which the frequency of addition is high, a state in which the number of times of addition is increased). Then, pattern symbols are displayed, and the addition specialized zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is met in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. good too.

(21) In the present embodiment, RT after 1BBA operation is completed is defined as non-RT, and RT after 1BBB operation is completed is defined as RT1. However, instead of moving to different RTs in this way, they may be moved to the same RT. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after the end of 1BBB operation. In this case, after the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be set as an additional specialized zone.

(22) In this embodiment, as management information, the advantageous section ratio (total), the continuous role ratio (6000 games and total), and the role ratio (6000 games and total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information such as a payout rate. Methods for calculating the payout rate include, for example, the following methods. a) "total number of payouts x 100" ÷ "total number of games excluding replays after winning replays" b) "(total number of payouts + number of winning replays x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games played" and a) is used, buffers for storing "total number of payouts x 100" and "total number of games excluding replays after replay wins" are provided. Also, when b) is employed, a buffer for storing "(total number of payouts + number of replay wins x 3) x 100" is provided. It is also possible to provide separate buffers for "total number of payouts x 100" and "replay winning times x 300" and add the values of both.

It should be noted that "3" in "Replay winning times x 3" means the number of bets on the game when the replay wins. For example, when the number of bets varies depending on the game state, etc., the value is not limited to "3", and the value bet on the game when the replay wins (for example, "2" or "1"). There may be games to play. In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games played, the total number of payouts per se, and the number of replay winnings itself (may be "the number of replay winning times x the value bet on the game when the replay wins") is provided, and the payout rate is determined. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Furthermore, as for the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the calculation method described above. By displaying the payout rate as one piece of management information and comparing it with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is fraudulent. Furthermore, in this case as well, if the lighting mode is changed according to whether the total number of games played is 6000 games or more or 175000 games or more, it is possible to more accurately determine whether the gaming machine is illegal. It is possible to determine whether Any type of information indicating the payout rate may be displayed as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P." to display the payout rate (three-digit numerical value).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits. When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" in the case of an increment counter, the advantageous interval is forcibly ended. default value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous interval counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of times of instruction function activated games (when the instruction function is activated when winning the small winning combination B), and the like. "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 storing the parameters to be initialized are consecutive. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", and so on.

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 accompanying a setting change, and the process of inserting "0" into the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be repeatedly performed while shifting the address by 1, so the initialization can be simplified. This is because it can be executed in a standardized process. It should be noted that the parameters that are cleared when the advantageous section is the upper limit value are also initialized when the settings are changed. Note that the addresses of the RWM 53 that store the parameters to be initialized are assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", etc.), and "0" is assigned to the addresses. Even when the process of inserting is repeatedly performed while shifting the address by a predetermined value ("2" in the above case) for initialization, the process can be simplified.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, when the count value is "0", it may be "0" due to initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) and become "0" cannot be determined from the count value. Therefore, when judging whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is the advantageous section (in a predetermined area of the RWM 53). stored). On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the upper limit is reached based only on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The updating of the data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processes of FIGS. 32, 36 and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically after the winning determination process. . On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is always displayed, for example, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed multiple times during one game. . It is also conceivable that the advantageous section ratio and the like are calculated each time they are displayed. As described above, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be calculated multiple times during one game. (25) The above-described embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being carried out independently, and can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Appendix> The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original inventions) include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 21, and the problems to be solved by each original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means for solving the above and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not meant to be limited to inventions 1 to 21 originally.

1. Original invention 1 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 1 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch. is. 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a conventional gaming machine that stores the cumulative number of payouts and graphically displays the transition of the cumulative number of payouts according to the player's operation (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121). reference). In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to check the cumulative number of payouts, but in a slot machine that executes AT, for example, it is impossible to know the ratio of AT to the entire game. In addition, it is not possible to determine whether the cumulative number of payouts is within the range of design values, etc., simply by displaying the accumulated value. The original problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to easily and accurately check the rate of stay in the advantageous section in a slot machine provided with the advantageous section.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section a first storage means ( RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) and a second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, " F004” to “F001”), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) and means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section when the conditions for displaying the stay ratio of the advantageous section are satisfied. .

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range.

2. Original invention 2 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 2 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 2 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section a first storage means ( RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) and a second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, " F004” to “F001”), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section when the conditions for displaying the stay ratio of the advantageous section are satisfied; When the stored value does not reach a predetermined value ("175000" games), a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the LED blinks), and the first storage When the value stored in the means reaches a predetermined value, the value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section is displayed in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, a mode in which an LED is lit). and

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. In addition, it is possible to easily determine how many times the value corresponding to the rate of staying in the advantageous section corresponds to the number of games played.

3. Original invention 3 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 3 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for initially solving the problem of Invention 3 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function operation game in which the pushing order instruction information is displayed), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed. , In the normal section, when the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and a value corresponding to the total number of games can be stored. A storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) and a second storage means (RWM53: FIG. 27 In the middle, "F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; Fig. 37), and means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section, and when a predetermined switch (for example, setting switch 13) is turned on. and the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is not displayed based on the predetermined switch being turned off.

The second solution is a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a minor combination B group) and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. , an instruction function activating game that activates the instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78), and a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed. , Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the above-mentioned instruction function activation game can be executed When the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. is a first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games after the advantageous interval is finished; a value obtained by multiplying the number of times by 100); means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the section (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37); means for displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)); and displaying a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section based on the operation of a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13), and displaying the stay rate of the advantageous section based on the operation of the predetermined switch again. It is characterized by ending the display of the value corresponding to the ratio.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. In addition, display/non-display of the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be switched by simply operating a predetermined switch.

4. Original invention 4 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 4 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval ends, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval is terminated. as a value corresponding to the total number of games played (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), and "in decimal" for each game in the advantageous section A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to 100" as a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, and a first storage means. Means (advantageous section control means 6
9; FIG. 37); and means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. Also, an integer value can be calculated when calculating the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section.

5. Original invention 5 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is terminated. A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to "1"" as a value corresponding to the total number of games played, and a 4-byte storage A second storage means (RWM53: 27, "F004" to "F001") and a 1-byte storage area, and is calculated based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means. A third storage means (RWM 53: "F008" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the section; ∼9)) and (c) Effect of original invention 5 Same as original invention 4.

6. Original invention 6 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 6 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a storage means (RWM53 ), and initialization means (power switch 11, reset switch 14) for initializing at least a part of the storage means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a transition condition from a normal section to an advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous interval is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval is terminated, and as the storage means, a value corresponding to a decimal number of “1” is added for each game. A first storage means (RWM 53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing the value corresponding to the total number of games played, and "100 in decimal" for each game in the advantageous section A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "value equivalent to" as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section, and a first storage Means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section based on the value stored in the means and the value stored in the second storage means; and means for displaying a value corresponding to the ratio (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)), wherein the initialization means does not initialize the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. Also, even if the initialization operation is performed, it is possible to display the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the data accumulated so far.

7. Original invention 7 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 7 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section a first storage means ( RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, Means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means; means for displaying a value to be displayed (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)); If the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means is not exceeded by adding , "a value corresponding to "1" in decimal number" is added to the value stored in the first storage means, and the first when the value stored in the storage means is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, controlling the value stored in the first storage means to be the upper limit even as the game progresses; When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the second storage means is maintained even if the game progresses during the advantageous section. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. Further, when the value stored in the first storage means reaches the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, updating of the values in the first storage means and the second storage means is terminated. data can be eliminated.

8. Original invention 8 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section a first storage means ( RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. A main control board (main control board 50) including means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. The main control board has a plurality of visible display units (digits 6 to 9), and when displaying a value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section, some of the display units (digit 6 and 7) display the content (information type) indicating the stay ratio of the advantageous section, and display the value (numerical value) corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section by some of the other display units (digits 8 and 9). characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the design value range. Further, even when a value other than the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit, for example, the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section can be identified without being confused with other information. .

9. Original invention 9 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 Same as original invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and a normal section a first storage means ( RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27), second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. A main control board (main control board 50) including means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37) for calculating a value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means. The main control board has a plurality of visible display units (digits 6 to 9), and a specific display when the value corresponding to the staying ratio of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (70%) A value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display section in a form (for example, blinking display), and when the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section does not exceed the specific value, the display is different from the specific display form. The value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is displayed on the display section in a form (for example, lighting display).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games played and a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is calculated. , can be displayed, so that the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed. Furthermore, whether or not the value corresponding to the rate of stay in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value can also be easily determined by the display mode.

10. Original invention 10 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 10 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, the notification of the winning of the AT is exclusively executed by the sub control board, and even if the main control board determines the winning of the AT, the main control board does not notify the winning of the AT. Further, even if the AT winning notification is performed using a peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board, the AT winning notification is performed after a predetermined game has been played from the game in which the AT has been won. There is a problem that the player may stop playing the game before the AT is informed of the winning. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is to display the transition to the advantageous section using a peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board when the transition to the advantageous section occurs, and is to make the display easier to notice.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function-activated game for displaying information), a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function-activated game is not executed, an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function-activated game can be executed, and accumulation of game media Equipped with stored number display means (stored number display LED 76) for displaying the number, and a settlement switch (46) operated when the stored game media are settled, and advantageous when conditions for shifting to an advantageous section are satisfied When the advantageous interval ending condition is satisfied, the stored number display means has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and DP) that can be lit, and a part thereof. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section , it is possible to display that it is an advantageous section by lighting the other segment until the operation of the adjustment switch becomes valid.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, it is possible to display that it is an advantageous section by using some segments of the stored number display means. In addition, since it is displayed that it is an advantageous section before the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game (operating the settlement switch) even though it is an advantageous section from the next game. can be suppressed.

11. Original invention 11 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 11 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). In addition, when AT is won, the number of precursor games is drawn, for example, and after the number of precursor games is consumed, AT winning notification is performed. On the other hand, recently, it is being considered to shift to an advantageous section with the election of a special role as an opportunity. Here, when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the special role, and when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of a role other than the special role, at what timing is the transition to the advantageous section displayed? The problem is whether it should be executed with Therefore, the first problem to be solved by the invention is to display the transition to the advantageous section at an appropriate timing when it is determined to transition to the advantageous section with the winning of a combination as a trigger.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and an advantageous section Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that, Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), A lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a first win (winning 1BBA) or a second win (single win of a small winning combination E1), wherein the winning probability of the first win is the same for all set values. The winning probability of the second winning is the same for all set values, and in the case of the first winning, the predetermined symbol combination (combination of 1BBA symbols) corresponding to the first winning does not stop. In the case of , the winning related to the predetermined combination of symbols is carried over to the next game, and when the second winning is won, the second winning is not carried over to the next game, and it is advantageous when the conditions for shifting to the advantageous section are satisfied. If the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section ends, and in the normal section, when the first and second elections are won, it is decided to move to the advantageous section. It is possible, and when it is determined to be the second winning in the normal section and to shift to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned When it is decided to move to the advantageous section after winning the first prize in the normal section by performing the display by the advantageous section display means, the display by the advantageous section display means is not performed by the predetermined timing (for example, 1BBA (during display) is possible.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, when the combination of the predetermined symbols corresponding to the first winning does not stop in the game in which the first winning is achieved, and the first winning is carried over to the next game. , the next game can be executed without displaying by the advantageous interval display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display by the advantageous section display means from being performed before the player is informed that the first lottery has been won. In other words, it is possible to prevent only the display by the advantageous interval display means from being executed when the winning combination is not won in the first winning game.

12. Original invention 12 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 Same as original invention 11. (b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 12 (Corresponding Embodiments are Described in Parentheses) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is a section; ), and a lottery means for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of first winning (double winning of 1BBA + small winning combination E1) or second winning (single winning of small winning combination E1), and winning probability of first winning. is the same for all set values, the probability of winning the second win is the same for all set values, and for the first win, the win is carried over to the next game until the combination of symbols stops (1BBA) , and a winning that includes a predetermined winning combination (small winning combination E1) that does not carry over to the next game, and the second winning includes winning that includes a predetermined winning combination and does not include a special winning combination, and the conditions for transitioning to an advantageous section are: If it meets the conditions, it will move to the advantageous section, and if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section will end. It is possible to decide to shift, and when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after winning the first prize in the normal section, it is possible to bet on the next game until a predetermined timing (betting on the next game is possible, and the settlement switch 46 can be operated) ), and there are cases where the display by the advantageous section display means is not performed until the predetermined timing. When it is determined to be the best, the display is performed by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing. The second solution means is that in the first solution means, in the game in which the first win is made, stopping the combination of symbols of the predetermined combination is prioritized over stopping the combination of symbols of the special combination. characterized by (c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section after winning the first prize, the advantageous section display means may or may not perform display by a predetermined timing. Therefore, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination is stopped and the display is performed by the advantageous interval display means, the player can continue to expect that the special combination will be won even after that. Become.

13. Original invention 13 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 13 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). In addition, when the AT is won, for example, the number of portent games is drawn by lottery, and after the number of portent games is consumed, the winning of the AT is notified. On the other hand, recently, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with the winning of a combination that is not carried over to the next game as a trigger, displaying the transition to the advantageous section before the start of the next game has been considered. ing. However, if the display is performed at an early stage in this way, there is a problem that it is difficult to execute a fan effect or the like to indicate whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to output, after that, an effect or the like related to the advantageous section, even when the shift to the advantageous section is displayed at an early stage.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 13 (Corresponding Embodiments are Described in Parentheses) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is a section; ) and specific winning (for example, single winning of small role E1)
and a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case where the probability of winning a specific election is the same for all set values, and when the conditions for transition to the advantageous interval are satisfied, the transition to the advantageous interval is performed, and the advantageous When the end condition of the section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends, and when it becomes a specific winning in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section, and it becomes a specific winning in the normal section and moves to the advantageous section. When it is decided to do so, the display is performed by the advantageous interval display means until a predetermined timing (until betting for the next game becomes possible and the settlement switch 46 becomes operable), and the advantageous interval displays at least one time. An instruction function operation game (a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is displayed when a small win group B is won) is executed. 1) and a second end condition (for example, the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section is 100 games).

The second solving means is, in the first solving means, as the end condition of the advantageous section, a third ending condition (playing from the start of the advantageous section) that takes precedence over the first ending condition and the second ending condition. 1500 games), and when the third end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended even before the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied. A third solving means is characterized in that, in the first or second solving means, a continuous effect can be output over a plurality of games when the display is performed by the advantageous interval display means.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous interval display means performs display early when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval, there are at least multiple termination conditions for the advantageous interval. In addition, since the game may end with one instruction function activation game, even after the display by the advantageous section display means, there is a production that agitates the player (for example, the player continues to have a sense of expectation). production) can be output.

14. Original invention 14 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 14 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, in the conventional technology, it was common to perform a lottery for AT even in a game in which the player was in the middle after winning a special role, but a game that tries to maintain the inner middle until the AT is won. Since the number of players has increased, recently it is considered desirable not to conduct an AT lottery in a game that has become internal. In addition, a middle cherry (rare small combination) is known as a stop result with high expectation of winning of AT. Here, there is a problem that if the middle stage cherry appears after the special role is inside (after the player learns that the special role has been won), the player is given the impression that the player has made a wasteful draw. . Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is not to stop the combination of symbols that can be expected to transition to the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section is not decided after the special role is inside. .

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 14 (Corresponding Embodiments are Described in Parentheses) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is a section; ), lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so as to have a case of specific winning (single winning of small role E1) or special winning (winning of 1BB), and lottery executed by said lottery means reel control means (65) for controlling the reels to stop when the stop switch is operated based on the result of (65); Including the winning of a special role that carries over the winning to the next game until the combination of symbols stops, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is transferred, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval. After finishing, when it becomes a specific winning in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section, and even if it becomes a specific winning in the normal section, carry over the winning of the special role If there is, it does not decide to move to the advantageous section, and the reel control means, in the game in the normal section in which the winning of the special combination is not carried over, when the specific winning is achieved, the symbol combination A (middle row In the game during the normal section in which the winning of the special combination is carried over, the combination of symbols B (combination of symbols in which cherry is displayed) is controlled so as to be able to be stopped, and when a specific winning is achieved, the combination of symbols B ( It is characterized in that control is performed so as to give priority to stopping the combination of symbols in which the middle row cherry is not displayed. The second solution is that in the first solution, the profit when the symbol combination A is stopped and the profit when the symbol combination B is stopped are the same (both payouts are 2). characterized by being

(c) Effect of the original invention 14 According to the original invention, when a special win is won in a non-internal role that has not been won in a special role, the winning flag is only for a specific win, but if a special role is won When it becomes specific winning inside the inside, the winning flag becomes special combination + specific winning. If the winning flags are different, the stop control of the reels can be changed. Utilizing this, in a non-internal specific win, the symbol combination A that can be expected to shift to an advantageous section is stopped, and in a specific win in the internal process, priority is given to stopping the symbol combination B (for example, the symbol do not stop combination A). Thus, by eliminating or reducing the stoppage of the symbol combination A that can be expected to shift to an advantageous section when the inside of the special role is reached, the player is given an impression of a wasteful draw. can be eliminated or reduced.

15. Original invention 15 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 15 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, in the conventional technology, even when winning a role for which a privilege (for example, the number of AT games played) is awarded during AT, there are circumstances in which the privilege cannot be granted, such as the upper limit of the award of the privilege being reached. there was a case. However, there is a problem that if the bonus is not given even if the stop roll to which the bonus is given appears, the player may feel distrustful. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is that if there is a special circumstance in which the privilege cannot be granted in the case of winning to be granted a privilege, the symbol corresponding to the winning to be granted the privilege is to prevent the combination of

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 15 (Corresponding Embodiments are Described in Parentheses) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Advantageous section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying the fact that it is a section; lottery means (combination lottery means 61) for executing lottery so that there is a possibility of a specific winning (single winning of minor winning combination E1); reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reels when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means; It is possible to stop A (combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is displayed) or combination of symbols B (combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is not displayed). It is possible to decide to end the advantageous section when the conditions for ending the section are satisfied, and to grant a privilege when a specific winning is achieved in the advantageous section, and the reel control means is controlled in the game in which the specific winning is achieved. , when the stop switch is operated in a specific operation mode (right first stop), the combination B of symbols can be stopped and the combination A of symbols is controlled not to be stopped, and a specific winning is achieved in an advantageous section, When it is decided to give the privilege, the specific operation mode is not notified, and when it is decided not to give the privilege, the specific operation mode is notified. The second solution is that in the first solution, the profit when the symbol combination A stops and the profit when the symbol combination B stops are the same (both payouts are 2). characterized by being

(c) Effect of the original invention 15 According to the original invention, there are cases in which a privilege is granted based on a specific win and a case in which it is not granted during an advantageous section. The corresponding symbol combination A is stopped, but when no privilege is given (for example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is close to the upper limit), the symbol combination A appears by notifying (instructing) a specific operation mode. don't let As a result, it is possible to perform control so that the combination A of symbols does not appear in a situation in which the privilege cannot be granted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of disbelief that the privilege is not given even though the symbol combination A appears.

16. Original invention 16 (a) Problem to be solved by original invention 16 slot machine. Conventionally, it is known to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when winning the pressing order bell) (for example, See JP-A-2014-161344). In addition, it is known to provide a winning combination in which the winning combination is different according to the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, pressing order bell) and a winning combination in which the same combination is won regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, common bell). It is If the winning probability of the pushing order bell or the common bell is changed according to the set value, the ball payout rate corresponding to the set value can be obtained. However, if a difference is provided in the winning probability according to the set value, there is a problem that the set value is easily guessed by counting the number of wins. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is that there are cases where the winning combination is won or not depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, a winning combination (for example, a bell in the order of pressing)), and regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. To prevent a set value from being guessed while providing a difference corresponding to the set value to the winning probability when setting a winning (for example, a common bell) for winning a winning combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 16 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) , a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining any of the set values; Lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery, and reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reels when a stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means. and wherein the winning probability of the first winning differs in at least two set values, the winning probability of the second winning differs in at least two set values, and the reel control means controls the game in which the first winning is achieved. , regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, the predetermined symbol combination ("black 7/watermelon" - "bell C" - "replay") is stopped, and the reel control means controls the second winning game Then, according to the operation mode of the stop switch, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the predetermined symbols may or may not be stopped, and a set value x (setting 1) and It has a set value y (set 6), and "the winning probability of the first win with the set value y (set value '1250')" - "the win probability of the first win with the set value x (set value '1000')" = p1 (placement difference ``250''), ``probability of winning the second win at setting value y (placement ``770'' x 12)''-``probability of winning the second win at setting value x (placement ``750'' × 12)”=p2 (the difference in the set number is “240”), p1>p2. A second solving means is, in the first solving means, wherein the number of game media paid out (9) when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped is the number of game media inserted in the game (3). It is characterized by being the maximum number of payouts.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, the combination of the same symbols (predetermined combination of symbols) is stopped when the first and second wins are pressed in the correct order. It is not possible to judge whether the winning is the first winning or the second winning only by stopping the combination of symbols. On the other hand, since the winning probability of the first winning regardless of the skill of the player is given a larger set difference than the winning probability of the second winning, the payout rate can be set according to the set value.

17. Original Invention 17 (a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a slot machine having winnings with different winning combinations depending on the operating mode of the stop switch. Conventionally, it is known to execute an instruction function activation game (AT) for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct pressing order when winning the pressing order bell) (for example, See JP-A-2014-161344). Here, this time, an advantageous section is provided, and during the advantageous section, at least one instruction function operation game is executed, and the instruction function operation game is the maximum number of payouts in the prescribed number of the game state. etc., are being considered. Therefore, the first problem to be solved by the present invention is to enable the instruction function activation game to be executed at an early stage when the instruction function activation game is executed once.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) 1st winning (winning small winning combination A), 2nd winning (winning small winning combination B), or 3rd winning (small winning combination C group) Lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of winning the winning lottery, and based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, the reels are stopped when the stop switch is operated. and reel control means (65) for controlling, wherein the winning probability of the first win is different in at least two set values, and the reel control means controls the operation mode of the stop switch in the game where the first win is won. Regardless, in a game in which a predetermined combination of symbols ("Black 7/Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay") is stopped and the second winning game is won, the predetermined The reels are controlled to stop so that there are cases where the combination of symbols is stopped and cases where it is not stopped, and in the game where the third win is made, a specific combination of symbols (" Bell A/Bell B"-"Blue 7/Cherry"-"Watermelon") is stopped and controlled so that the reels are stopped and not stopped, and the game is played when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped. The payout number of media (9) is the maximum payout number for the prescribed number of game media in the game, and the probability of winning the second win (for example, setting 1, number "750" x 12) is the third It is characterized by being set higher than the winning probability of winning (for example, setting 1, set number "200"×3).

(c) Effect of the original invention 17 According to the original invention, the probability of winning the second prize is higher than the probability of winning the third prize. At least one possible "indicative function activation game" can be performed.

18. Original invention 18 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 18 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). However, when a combination that triggers a transition to an advantageous section and a combination that does not trigger a transition are provided, and the combination of the same symbols can be stopped in both cases, the problem is what kind of reel stop control should be executed. . Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately perform stop control of the reels when a combination that triggers a transition to an advantageous section and a combination that does not trigger a transition are provided, and when these combinations are won. is.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 18 (Corresponding Embodiments are Described in Parentheses) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function actuating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the set values (setting 1 to setting 6), and the first winning (winning small winning combination E1) or the second winning (small winning combination Lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that there is a possibility of winning E2), and based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, when the stop switch is operated, reels reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values; the winning probability of the second winning is different for at least two set values; It is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section when the transition conditions are met, to end the advantageous section when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and to move to the advantageous section when the first win is made in the normal section. When the second win is made in the normal section, the reel control means does not decide to shift to the advantageous section, , the same stop control is executed (the middle cherry can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and the middle cherry is not stopped at the right first stop).

The second solution is a game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a minor combination B group) and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. , an instruction function activating game that activates the instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78), and a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function activating game is not executed. , Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed; Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 ), lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so as to have a first winning (winning a small winning combination E1) or a second winning (winning a small winning combination E2), and executed by the lottery means. reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reels when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the drawn lottery, wherein the winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values; The probability of winning the second election is different in at least two set values, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval ends, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval ends. When the first win is made in the section, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section, and when the second win is made in the normal section, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the reel control means controls the reels so as to stop or not stop a predetermined combination of symbols (middle stage cherry) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch in the first winning game; In the game in which the second win is made, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the predetermined symbols may or may not be stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, and the win is the first win. In the game and the second winning game, when the stop switch is operated in the operation mode (left or middle first stop) to stop the combination of the predetermined symbols, the predetermined stop control is performed by the same stop control. An operation of stopping the combination of symbols (prioritizing the winning of the small winning combination 36 that stops the cherry in the middle stage, and winning the small winning combination 38 when the small winning combination 36 cannot be won) and stopping the predetermined combination of symbols. When the stop switch is not operated in the mode (right first stop), a different stop control is executed (for example, when winning the first win, the small winning combination 38 is won, and when winning the second win, the small winning combination 41 is won. It is characterized by winning a prize).

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 18 According to the first solution, the same stop control is executed both at the time of the first winning and at the time of the second winning. The player does not know whether it is the first win or the second win without deciding to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section. Further, according to the second solving means, when the stop switch is operated in a manner of stopping the combination of predetermined symbols at the time of the first winning or the second winning, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to know whether it is the first winning that is not determined or the second winning that does not decide to shift to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the stop switch is not operated in the operation mode to stop the combination of the predetermined symbols, it is determined whether it is the first winning that can decide to shift to the advantageous section by the stop result or the like. It is possible for the player to determine whether it is the second winning that does not decide to shift to .

19. Original invention 19 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 19 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that operates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) It is known to perform (AT) Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed by a sub control board as well as by a main control board (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344). By the way, when shifting to a special game during an advantageous interval, it is desirable to set a higher set value so that more benefits are given during the advantageous interval. However, in the case of granting a privilege in association with the winning of a conditional device, there is a demand that the privilege should be granted on the condition that a conditional device having no set difference is won. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is to provide a privilege on the condition that a conditional device that does not have a set difference is won when shifting to a special game during an advantageous section, and the higher the set value, the higher the privilege is to increase the probability that is granted.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 19 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function actuating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and special winning including special role (winning including 1BBA) The lottery means for executing the lottery is provided, the probability of winning the special election is the same for all set values, and when the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and the end condition for the advantageous section is set. When it is satisfied, the advantageous section ends, special winning occurs, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops, it shifts to a special game (1BBA is in operation). The number is set to exceed a predetermined number (150), and the lottery means executes a lottery so as to have a specific winning (replay D winning) case in the special game, The probability of winning a specific win is the same for all set values, and when a special win is made in a special game in an advantageous section, it is possible to decide to grant a privilege (add the advantageous section), and the set value has a set value x (setting 1) and a set value y (setting 6), and the expected value of the number of games during the special game when the set value is y is the expected value of the number of games during the special game when the set value is x It is characterized by being larger than the expected value of the number of games played.

The second solving means is the first solving means, wherein the lottery means executes a lottery so as to have a first or second winning in the special game, and the first winning (small winning combination A) winning) is different in at least two set values, the winning probability of the second win (winning the minor combination E2) is different in at least two set values, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the first win has stopped. The number of game media paid out at this time is greater than the number of game media paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second winning is stopped, and the winning probability of the first winning in the special game is higher than when the set value is y. is set higher when the set value is x, and the winning probability of the second win in the special game is set lower when the set value is x than when the set value is y. characterized by The third solving means is the first or second solving means, wherein the specific win is a win related to a predetermined replay role, and in the special game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined replay role is stopped. is not counted in the number of payouts of game media during the special game.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, when shifting to a special game, the set value y has a larger expected value of the number of games to stay in the special game than the set value x. Therefore, the special game with the setting value y has a higher probability of winning the specific prize than the special game with the setting value x. Therefore, the set value y makes it possible to increase the probability of awarding a privilege in the special game during the advantageous section than the set value x.

20. Original invention 20 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 20 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) (AT) is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). Here, when a privilege is granted when shifting to a special game during an advantageous section, it is possible to grant a privilege in a special game based on winning a special role that does not have a setting difference, and a special role that has a setting difference There is a demand not to give a privilege in a special game based on winning a prize. However, if such a setting is made, there is a problem that the special game based on winning the special role with the setting difference cannot give the player a sense of expectation for the provision of the privilege. Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to expect the provision of benefits even when shifting to a special game based on winning a special role with a setting difference.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when winning a small win group B), and a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (displayed by the winning number display LED 78 an instruction function activating game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed; a normal section of the game section in which the instruction function actuating game is not executed; an advantageous section of the game section in which the instruction function activating game can be executed; Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and the first special winning including the first special role (1BBA), or the second Lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of a second special winning including a special role (1BBB), wherein the winning probability of the first special winning is the same for all set values, and the probability of winning the second special winning is the same for all set values. The odds of winning are different in at least two set values. When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval is entered, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are met, the advantageous interval ends, resulting in the first special win. , When the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st special role stops, it shifts to the 1st special game, becomes the 2nd special winning, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the 2nd special role stops, the 2nd special Shifting to the game, during the first special game in the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to grant the privilege, during the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to grant the privilege, the advantageous section It is characterized in that it is possible to decide to give a privilege under a predetermined condition after the second special game in the game is finished.

The second solving means is, in the first solving means, when the first special game ends, the game state is shifted to the first game state (non-RT), and when the second special game ends, the game state changes to the first game state. In the second game state, the winning probability of the specific winning (replay E winning) is set higher than in the first gaming state, and the winning probability of the specific winning is , all set values are the same, and it is characterized in that it is possible to decide to grant a privilege when a specific winning is achieved in an advantageous section.

(c) Effect of the original invention 20 According to the original invention, there are a first special game in which it is possible to decide to give a privilege during the advantageous interval, and a second special game in which it is not decided to give a privilege during the advantageous interval. is provided, it is possible to give a privilege based on the completion of the second special game, so even when the second special game is shifted to, the expectation that the privilege is given is given. be able to. In addition, with regard to specific granting, the first special game and the second special game can be balanced, and the timing of granting each benefit can be unique.

21. Original invention 21 (a) Problems to be solved by original invention 21 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct press order when winning the press order bell) (AT) is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). Here, when an advantageous section is provided, when a special role is won during the advantageous section and the transition to the special game is made, the question is whether to continue counting the advantageous section (for example, subtraction of the number of games played). . Therefore, the first problem to be solved by the invention is to adjust the count of the advantageous section when the game shifts to the special game during the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) (for example, a game when a small win group B is won), and in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is operated (indicating the pressing order to the winning number display LED 78). an instruction function operation game for displaying information), a normal section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed, and an advantageous section in the game section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed, and an advantageous section When the conditions for transitioning to are satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section ends, and when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section ends. A first counter (advantageous interval counter 69a) that counts; A second counter (upper limit counter 69b) that counts a second variable for determining whether or not the upper limit termination condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied; A lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have the first special winning including 1BBA) or the second special winning including the second special role (1BBB), based on the count value of the first counter, When it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval is terminated, and based on the count value of the second counter, when it is determined that the upper limit termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval even before the termination condition. is completed, the first special win is achieved, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special role stops, the first special game is entered, the second special win is achieved, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special role When the is stopped, it is possible to decide to add the advantageous section during the first special game in the advantageous section, and when adding the advantageous section, the end condition is extended. However, during the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to add the advantageous section, during the first special game, the first counter and the second counter can be updated, and during the second special game, The feature is that the second counter can be updated and the first counter is not updated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, the first special game in which it is possible to decide to add an advantageous section updates the first counter, but the second special game that does not decide to add an advantageous section Since the first counter is not updated in , the counting of the advantageous section can be balanced between the first special game and the second special game.

1 Base 10 Slot Machine 11 Power Switch 12 Setting Key Switch 13 Setting Switch 14 Reset Switch 15 Door Switch 16 Board Case 16a Crimping Part 17 Display Window 21 Production Lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image Display Device 24 Cross Key 25 Menu Button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board ( Main Control Means) 51 Input Port 52 Output Port 53 RWM 54 ROM 55 Main CPU 61 Role Lottery Means 62 Winning Flag Control Means 63 Push Order Instruction Number Selection Means 64 Effect Group Number Selection Means 65 Reel Control Means 66 Winning Judgment Means 67 Payout Means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED 74 Management information display LED 75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED 77 Advantageous section display LED 78 Obtained number display LED 80
Sub Control Board (Sub Control Means) 81 Input Port 82 Output Port 83 RWM 84 ROM 85 Sub CPU 91 Effect Output Control Means 100 External Common Terminal Board 200 Hall Computer

Claims (1)

Equipped with predetermined display means capable of displaying game history information,
The game history information is composed of information about the type of game history and numerical information about the game history,
As the game history information, there is a case where the role material ratio information for a predetermined number of games is displayed and a case where the accumulated role material ratio information is displayed,
Numerical information on the game history corresponding to the role material ratio information for the predetermined number of games is the role material ratio for the predetermined number of games (payout of game media when the role material is activated in the predetermined number of games against the total number of game media paid out in the predetermined number of games) percentage of the number) and
Numerical information related to the gaming history corresponding to the cumulative role ratio information is the cumulative role ratio (ratio of the number of game media paid out when the role product is activated to the total number of game media paid out),
making it possible to display information related to the type of game history by means of the first display section and the second display section of the predetermined display means;
Numerical information relating to game history can be displayed on the third display section and the fourth display section of the predetermined display means,
When the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display section is configured to be lit,
When displaying the cumulative role ratio information, if the cumulative number of games played is less than a specific value, information on the type of game history corresponding to the cumulative role ratio information can be displayed blinking,
In the case of displaying the role product ratio information for the predetermined number of games played, if the total number of games played is less than a predetermined value (the predetermined value is smaller than the specific value), the game history corresponding to the role product ratio information for the predetermined number of games played information about the type of
A slot machine characterized by being constructed so as to end update of the cumulative number of games when the cumulative number of games reaches a specific upper limit value.

Images